Sony Ericsson GM48 User Manual

GM47/GM48  
Product Photo/Illustration  
Contents  
3
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2
2.15 External I C Serial Control Bus .................................................................. 65  
4
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
5
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
6
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
7
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
8
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
9
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
10  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
Part 1: Overview  
Product Photo/Illustration  
 
1. Introduction  
1.1 Target Users  
GM47 and GM48 modules are designed to be integrated into machine-  
to-machine or man-to-machine communications applications. They are  
intended to be used by manufacturers, system integrators, applications  
developers and developers of wireless communications equipment.  
1.2 Prerequisites  
It is assumed that the person integrating the GM47 or GM48 into an  
application has a basic understanding of the following:  
• GSM networking;  
• Wireless communication and antennas (aerials);  
AT commands;  
• ITU-T standard V.24/V.28;  
• Micro controllers and programming;  
• Electronic hardware design.  
1.3 Manual Structure  
The manual is composed of four parts:  
Part 1- Overview  
This section provides a broad overview of the GM47/GM48 family and  
includes a list of abbreviations used in the manual.  
Part 2 - Developer’s Kit  
This section lists the contents of the whole development kit and  
provides the information to setup and use the equipment.  
Part 3 - Integrating the Module  
This section describes each of the signals available on the GM47/GM48  
modules, along with mechanical information. The section also provides  
you with design guidelines and explains what is needed to  
commercialise an application from a regulatory point of view.  
13  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Part 4 - Using AT Commands  
This section lists all the AT commands relevant to the GM47 and  
GM48, including their required parameters. The purpose of part 4 is to  
give you detailed information on the function of the AT command set.  
14  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
2. GM47/GM48 MODULES  
2. GM47/GM48 Modules  
2.1 About the GM47/GM48 Family  
Two modules make up the family; GM47 and GM48, for use in the  
900/1800MHz and 850/1900MHz GSM bands respectively.  
Note!  
As the characteristics of the modules are quite similar, this manual only  
refers to the GM48 where a difference exists; by default all other  
references are to the GM47.  
The products belong to a new generation of Sony Ericsson modules, and  
are intended to be used in machine-to-machine applications and man-to-  
machine applications. They are used when there is a need to send and  
receive data (by SMS, CSD, HSCSD, or GPRS), and make voice calls  
over the GSM network.  
GM47 modules are not “stand alone” devices; they are used as the  
engine in an application created by the customer. A typical application,  
involves a micro-controller and GM47 module, in which the micro-  
controller sends AT commands to the module via an RS232  
communications link.  
2.2 GM47 in a Communication System  
Figure 2.1 illustrates the main blocks of a wireless communication  
system using the GM47. It also shows the communication principles of  
the system. The definitions in the figure, as used elsewhere in this  
manual, are in accordance with the recommendations of GSM 07.07.  
• The MS (mobile station) represents the GM47 module plus SIM  
card. The module excluding SIM card, is known as the ME (mobile  
equipment).  
• The TE (terminal equipment) is a micro-controller (i.e., a computer)  
and is a part of the application.  
Wireless Communication System  
GSM Network  
Application  
ME status, responses  
TE  
(DTE)  
MS  
(GM47)  
AT commands to control MS  
Figure 2.1 Main Blocks in a Wireless System  
15  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
In accordance with the recommendations of ITU-T (International  
Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications Standardisation  
Sector) V.24, the TE communicates with the MS over a serial interface.  
The functions of the GM47 follow the recommendations provided by  
ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) and ITU-T.  
ETSI specifies a set of AT commands for controlling the GSM element  
of the module; these commands are supplemented by Sony Ericsson  
specific commands.  
To find out how to work with AT commands, see “Part 4: Using AT  
Figure 2.2 illustrates the interface between the module and the  
application. The entire System Connector Interface is described in  
Signals  
and power  
Antenna  
connector  
MS  
(GM47)  
TE  
(Application)  
60 pin  
system connector  
Figure 2.2 The Interface between the Module and the Application  
Note!  
ITU-T standards define TE and TA as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment)  
and DCE (Data Circuit Terminating Equipment) respectively.  
16  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
2. GM47/GM48 MODULES  
2.3 Features  
The module performs a set of telecom services (TS) according to GSM  
standard phase 2+, ETSI and ITU-T. The functions of the module are  
implemented by issuing AT commands over a serial interface.  
2.3.1 Types of Mobile Station  
GM47 and GM48 are dual band mobile stations with the characteristics  
shown in the tables below.  
GM47  
GSM900  
E-GSM900  
GSM1800  
Frequency Range (MHz)  
TX: 890-915  
RX: 935-960  
TX: 880-890  
RX: 925-935  
TX: 1710-1785  
RX: 1805-1880  
Channel spacing  
200kHz  
200kHz  
Number of channels  
173 carriers *8 (TDMA)  
GSM: channels 1 to 124  
E-GSM: channels 975 to 1023  
374 carriers *8 (TDMA)  
DCS: channels 512 to 885  
Modulation  
GMSK  
GMSK  
TX phase accuracy  
Duplex spacing  
< 5º RMS phase error (burst)  
45MHz  
< 5º RMS phase error (burst)  
95MHz  
Receiver sensitivity at  
antenna connector  
< –102dBm  
< –102dBm  
Transmitter output power  
at antenna connector  
Class 4  
2W (33dBm)  
Class 1  
1W (30dBm)  
Automatic hand-over between GSM 900 and GSM1800  
GM48  
GSM850  
GSM1900  
Frequency Range (MHz)  
TX: 824-849  
RX: 869-894  
TX: 1850-1910  
RX: 1930-1990  
Channel spacing  
200kHz  
200kHz  
123 carriers *8 (TDMA)  
GSM: channels 128 to 251  
298 carriers *8 (TDMA)  
PCS: channels 512 to 810  
Number of channels  
Modulation  
GMSK  
GMSK  
TX Phase Accuracy  
Duplex spacing  
< 5º RMS phase error (burst)  
45MHz  
< 5º RMS phase error (burst)  
80MHz  
Receiver sensitivity at  
antenna connector  
< –102dBm  
< –102dBm  
Transmitter output power  
at antenna connector  
Class 5  
0.8W (29dBm)  
Class 1  
1W (30dBm)  
Automatic hand-over between GSM850 and GSM1900  
17  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.3.2 Short Message Service  
The module supports the following SMS services:  
• Sending; MO (mobile-originated) with both PDU (protocol data  
unit) and text mode supported.  
• Receiving; MT (mobile-terminated) with both PDU and text mode  
supported.  
• CBM (cell broadcast message); a service in which a message is sent  
to all subscribers located in one or more specific cells in the GSM  
network (for example, traffic reports).  
• SMS STATUS REPORT according to GSM 03.40.  
• SMS COMMAND according to GSM 03.40.  
The maximum length of an SMS message is 160 characters when using  
7-bit encoding. For 8-bit data, the maximum length is 140 characters.  
The module supports concatenated messages to extend this function. It  
is disabled if CNMI 3,2 is set (See “AT+CNMI New Message  
2.3.3 Voice Calls  
The GM47 offers the capability of mobile originated and mobile  
terminated voice calls, as well as supporting emergency calls.  
Multi-party, call waiting and call deflection features are available.  
Some of these features are network-operator specific.  
For the inter-connection of audio, the module offers both single ended  
and balanced analogue input and output lines. Direct interface to the  
digital PCM (pulse code modulation) bus used within the module is  
available, thus by-passing the internal analogue circuitry.  
2.3.4 Data  
The module supports the following data protocols:  
• GPRS (General Packet Radio Service)  
Modules are Class B terminals, which provide simultaneous  
activation and attachment of GPRS and GSM services. GM47  
modules are GPRS 4+1 enabled devices, which are capable of  
transmitting in one timeslot per frame (up link), and receiving at a  
maximum of four timeslots per frame (down link).  
• CSD (Circuit Switched Data)  
GM47 modules are capable of establishing a CSD communication at  
9.6kbps.  
• HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data).  
GM47 supports HSCSD communication, with one timeslot per  
frame capacity in the up link and two timeslots per frame capacity in  
the down link (2+1).  
18  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
2. GM47/GM48 MODULES  
2.3.5 SIM Card  
An external SIM card with 3V or 5V technology, can be connected to  
the module via its 60-pin system connector.  
2.3.6 Average Power Consumption  
Idle Mode  
Transmit/Operation  
Voice/CSD  
<5mA  
<5mA  
<5mA  
<5mA  
<250mA (<2A peak)  
<350mA (<2A peak)  
<250mA (<1.75A peak)  
<350mA (<1.75A peak)  
GSM850 and GSM900  
Data (GPRS 4+1)  
Voice/CSD  
GSM1800 and GSM1900  
Data (GPRS 4+1)  
Note!  
The power consumption during transmission is measured at maximum  
transmitted power.  
2.3.7 Other Features  
These include:  
• 07.10 multiplexing.  
• GPS interoperability.  
• SIM application tool kit.  
2.4 Service and Support  
2.4.1 Web Pages  
Visit our web site for the following information:  
• where to buy modules or for recommendations concerning  
accessories and components;  
• the telephone number for customer support in your region;  
• FAQs (frequently asked questions).  
The web site address is:  
2.4.2 Integrator’s Manual  
This manual provides you with all of the information you need to  
integrate the module into your application.  
19  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
           
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.4.3 Developer’s Kit  
Sony Ericsson provides the opportunity for designers to test the module  
on a limited scale using its Developer’s Kit. The kit includes the  
necessary accessories (software and hardware) required to build and test  
an application. It includes the following:  
• GSM module, GM47 or GM48;  
• This integrator’s manual;  
• Software developer’s kit and manual;  
• Developer’s kit hardware.  
All the user needs to provide, is a computer or micro-controller and the  
expertise to use AT commands.  
2.5 Precautions  
GM47 and GM48 modules are static sensitive devices (SSDs). Normal  
SSD procedures for electronic devices should be used when handling  
more information about safety and product care. Do not exceed the  
environmental and electrical limits as specified in “Technical Data”,  
20  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
3. ABBREVIATIONS  
3. Abbreviations  
Abbreviation  
Explanations  
Cell Broadcast Message  
CBM  
CBS  
CSD  
DCE  
DTE  
Cell Broadcast Service  
Circuit Switched Data  
Data Circuit Terminating Equipment  
Data Terminal Equipment  
Dual Tone Multi Frequency  
Enhanced Full Rate  
DTMF  
EFR  
EMC  
ETSI  
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility  
European Telecommunication Standards Institute  
Full Rate  
FR  
GPRS  
GPS  
GSM  
HR  
General Packet Radio Service  
Global Positioning System  
Global System for Mobile Communication  
Half Rate  
HSCSD  
ITU-T  
High Speed Circuit Switched Data  
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications  
Standardisation Sector  
ME  
Mobile Equipment  
Mobile Originated  
Mobile Station  
MO  
MS  
MT  
Mobile Terminated  
Pulse Code Modulation  
Protocol Data Unit  
Radio Link Protocol  
Radio Frequency  
PCM  
PDU  
RLP  
RF  
RTC  
SDP  
SIM  
SMS  
Real Time Clock  
Service Discovery Protocol  
Subscriber Identity Module  
Short Message Service  
21  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Abbreviation  
Explanations  
TA  
TE  
Terminal Adapter  
Terminal Equipment  
Third Harmonic Distortion  
Telecom Services  
THD  
TS  
22  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
Part 2: Developer’s Kit  
Product Photo/Illustration  
 
1. Introduction  
1.1 Overview  
The developer’s kit is designed to get you started quickly. It contains all  
the hardware you will need to begin the development of an application.  
The only items you need to provide are; a computer or micro controller,  
a SIM card and network subscription, and a knowledge of programming  
with AT commands.  
Note!  
Before connecting up and using the developer’s kit, we strongly  
of this section. There are many switches, jumpers and connector options  
in the developer’s kit. A knowledge of the functionality of the GM47  
module is therefore essential before you start altering the hardware  
settings.  
The main hardware in the developer’s kit is a screened box, containing  
a board onto which you plug the GM47 module. Connectors, switches,  
jumpers and SIM card holder are provided to allow you to configure and  
access all the functions of the module.  
1.2 Contents of the Kit  
Please take the time to check the contents of your kit against the list  
shown below. If any of the items are missing contact your supplier  
immediately.  
Developer’s kit - Part Number DPY 102 218  
Contents:  
Description  
Product Number  
Qty  
Radio modem:  
GM47 module or  
GM48 module  
1
DPY 102 201  
DPY 102 204  
GM47/GM48 developer’s kit (screened  
box and development board)  
KRY 101 1907  
1
Switched mode PSU 12V d.c.  
UK mains plug  
EPA-121DA-12  
1
1
1
EN90POWERLEADUK  
EN90POWERLEADEU  
European mains plug  
25  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Description  
Product Number  
Qty  
Cable with connector/cable serial 9-9 PIN  
Portable handsfree  
DB9(M)-DB9(F)  
2002-1-24  
1
1
1
1
Quad band antenna  
RG174  
Data carrier/CD-ROM containing:  
Software Manual;  
Integrator’s Manual  
LZY 213 1319  
1.3 General Functioning of the Kit  
The following block diagrams are provided to help you understand the  
general principles of operation of the developer’s kit.  
You have the following options as shown in Figure 1.1:  
• Connect the GM47 internally, direct to J4 or position it externally  
and connect to J10 via a flat cable.  
• Use the kit’s connectors to access and control the GM47 (all  
switches and jumpers in their default positions).  
• Access and control the GM47 directly via J12 and a flat cable. This  
allows you to selectively bypass any circuits contained on the board,  
and test your own application.  
Pin header  
60 pins male  
1.27mm pitch  
J12  
Pins connected in parallel  
External  
Application  
J11  
J10  
J4  
User selectable  
jumpers  
fit direct to J4  
GM47  
alternate flat cable to J10  
Developer's  
board circuits  
and ports  
Pin headers  
60 pins female  
1.27mm pitch  
Pin header  
60 pins male  
2.54mm pitch  
Developer's board  
Figure 1.1 Module connections to the developers board  
Figure 1.2 shows the various on-board voltages and how they are fed to  
the GM47 and other circuitry. The developer’s board is powered by an  
external power supply connected to Vcc.  
26  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
1. INTRODUCTION  
5V to development  
board circuits  
Switched  
when VIO  
present  
VIO present  
LED  
2V7  
To development  
board & interface  
circuits  
5V  
reg.  
2V7  
reg.  
VIO  
GM47  
3V8  
VCC  
3V8  
reg.  
12v  
Vcc  
DC Power Socket,  
Input 10..15V  
+
-
TP4 TP5  
Figure 1.2 Power supply connection and the on-board voltages  
routed on the developer’s board. Thicker lines indicate multiple signals.  
J12  
VIO  
General purpose I/O  
LED  
STATUS LED  
(Blinks when  
connected to network)  
ON/OFF  
SERVICE  
I²C  
SW4  
ON/OFF  
GM47  
2V7  
SERVICE LED  
(Lit when SW4 closed)  
n/c  
VRTC  
SIM  
0.22F  
J5  
Selectable  
Jumpers  
SIM holder with  
SIM presence  
switch (to DGND)  
U10 SIM  
Figure 1.3 Miscellaneous signals, connection and routing  
27  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
J12  
ATMS  
AFMS  
(Audio out)  
(Audio in)  
EAR  
3.5mm socket  
MIC  
3.5mm socket  
MICN, MICP, BEARN, BEARP  
GM47  
Handset  
RJ11 connector  
Buzzer  
PCM  
Buzzer  
PCM  
Selectable  
Jumpers  
8 pin Mini-DIN  
Figure 1.4 Audio signals, connection and routing  
J12  
TD, RD, DTR, DCD,  
RTS, CTS, RI  
UART1 (EDB)  
TD2, RD2 & SERVICE  
TD3 & RD3  
GM47  
UART2 (ACB)  
UART3  
Selectable  
jumpers  
Level shifters  
Figure 1.5 Comms signals, connection and routing  
28  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
2. USING THE DEVELOPER’S KIT  
2. Using the Developer’s Kit  
This section provides you with the information needed to setup and use  
the developer’s kit. Before changing switch and jumper settings, refer  
Front and rear views of the developer’s kit are shown below. To access  
the inside, remove the 8 screws on the top of the box and the cover plate.  
48 Developer's Kit  
GM47/GM  
SET  
D
AN  
H
M
PC  
CE  
S
EAR  
I
MIC  
U
V
R
IO  
C
D
A
T
SE  
Vcc  
ST  
ON/OF  
VIO  
V
OFF  
APP  
5
+
C
OFF  
ON  
N
v
12  
Figure 2.1 Front view  
RF  
2
T
UAR  
1
T
UAR  
3
T
UAR  
Figure 2.2 Rear view  
29  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.1 Start up Check List  
To use the developer’s kit in standard format check the following:  
• With the case lid removed, make sure the GM47 module is plugged  
into J4 and the RF lead is connected to the rear of the module;  
• Add your SIM card;  
• Check the jumpers are in their default positions. Refer to Figure 2.3;  
• Connect the serial cable between your computer and UART1 on the  
rear panel;  
• Connect the antenna to the RF connector on the rear panel;  
• Connect the audio equipment if required;  
• Plug the external power supply into the socket marked 12v on the  
front panel;  
• Switch Vcc to ON;  
• Push ON/OFF for at least 2 seconds until the yellow VIO LED is on.  
Your developer’s kit should now be operational and ready to receive AT  
commands.  
30  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
2. USING THE DEVELOPER’S KIT  
2.2 Developer’s Board Overlay  
Figure 2.3 shows the developer’s board, including the position of all the  
connectors, switches and jumpers (default positions). You will notice  
that many jumpers are labelled “SW”. This is because the board was  
previously fitted with DIL switches.  
UART2  
(ACB)  
UART1  
(EDB)  
UART3  
Ground stud  
RF connector  
U10  
SIM  
Holder  
TP5 TP4  
VCC  
SIM test  
connector  
J5  
J11  
J12  
SW8  
SW1  
J10  
J4  
SW9  
SW11  
SW7  
SW6  
SW3  
SW5  
JP18  
JP21  
SW10  
JP24  
SW4  
12v Vcc  
DC Power NC/OFF/ON  
DCIO  
Maintain in  
ON/OFF  
(module)  
Handset  
PCM  
MIC  
EAR  
Audio in Audio out  
(ATMS) (AFMS)  
Socket,  
Input  
10..15V d.c.  
power to  
module  
OFF position  
(Not used with this module.  
Only present for backward  
compatibility)  
Figure 2.3 Developers board overlay  
31  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.3 Jumpers, Switches and Connectors  
You will notice that many jumpers are labelled “SW”. This is because  
the board was previously fitted with DIL switches. All jumpers are  
located on the developer’s board (see “Developer’s board overlay”,  
Jumper  
Signal  
Setting  
JP18  
TD  
Maintain jumper in  
lower default position  
JP21 JP18  
JP21  
JP24  
RD  
Maintain jumper in  
lower default position  
Reserved for  
future use  
MUST remain open to prevent  
damage to the module. As an extra  
precaution, maintain DCIO in the OFF  
position  
SW4  
SERVICE  
Connect the pins using the floating  
connector ONLY when programming  
the module or logging data  
SW1, SW3, SW5,  
SW6, SW7, SW8,  
SW9, SW10,  
See diagram  
below  
Default positions shown below. Move  
any “SW” jumper to the right-hand  
position to divert the signal to  
connector J12. Remove the J11 links  
to bypass J8, J9 or CP1 and process  
audio signals externally  
SW11, J11 links  
J11  
SIMRST  
SIMCLK  
SCL  
ON/OFF  
PRESENCE  
SIMVCC  
SIMDAT  
SDA  
SW8  
SW1  
SW9  
SW6  
SW3  
SW5  
BUZZER  
LED  
RI  
DCD  
VRTC  
DTR  
CTS  
RD3 (RX3)  
TD3 (TX3)  
RTS  
RD (DFMS)  
The links shown  
on J11 must be  
in place to  
SW11  
SW7  
PCMULD  
PCMIN  
TD (DTMS)  
RD2 (CFMS)  
TD2 (CTMS)  
PCMDLD  
access audio  
on J8, J9 or CP1  
PCMOUT  
PCMCLK  
47  
49  
48  
50  
BEARP  
SERVICE  
AFMS  
PCMSYN  
MICN  
MICP  
ATMS  
BEARN  
SW10  
59  
60  
32  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
2. USING THE DEVELOPER’S KIT  
All switches are mounted on the front panel of the developer’s box.  
Switch  
Description  
Operation  
Vcc  
Toggle switch  
Switches power from external power supply to  
module. Has three positions; NC, OFF and ON.  
Switch to ON to connect power to the module  
ON/OFF  
DCIO  
Push button  
switch  
Switches module on and off. To power up the  
module, push button for at least 2 seconds,  
until the yellow VIO LED is on. Repeat the  
process to turn the module off  
Toggle switch  
Maintain in OFF position. Included only for  
backwards compatibility  
Connector  
Description  
Connections  
UART1  
(EDB)  
9-way  
Full 9-pin RS232 communication port. Used  
during run-time to communicate with the  
module (AT-commands, data transmission,  
etc.)  
D socket  
(accessible  
on the rear  
panel)  
DCD  
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
RD  
RTS  
TD  
CTS  
DTR  
RI  
UART2  
(ACB)  
9-way  
3 line RS232 communications port  
(+SERVICE). Used during service and  
maintenance operations. Also used to  
download new software to the module  
D socket  
(accessible  
on the rear  
panel)  
1
6
RD2  
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
SERVICE  
TD2  
UART3  
9-way  
3 line serial port. RS232 levels  
D socket  
(accessible  
on the rear  
panel)  
1
6
RD3  
TD3  
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
33  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Connector  
Description  
Connections  
Handset  
RJ11 socket  
Connector for a standard telephone  
handset. As PCM paths are open inside the  
module, a default short circuit is made  
between PCMDLD-PCMIN and PCMULD-  
PCMOUT signals on test connector J11 to  
enable analogue audio in downlink and  
uplink directions. Jumpers are in place  
between pins 48 & 50 and between pins 47  
& 49  
1 2 3 4  
Pin #  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
MICN  
BEARN  
BEARP  
MICP  
PCM  
8 pin mini-DIN  
connector  
Carries PCM signals  
Pin #  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
VIO (2.75V d.c. output)  
PCMULD  
PCMDLD  
9
8
PCMCLK  
1
6
PCMSYNC  
DGND  
PCMIN  
2
5
7
PCMOUT  
DGND  
3
4
J4  
J5  
SYSTEM  
Allows direct connection of the module to  
the development board (see Figure 2.3,  
connector  
SIM card test  
connector  
Connector to gain access to the SIM card  
signals, which are connected in parallel with  
U10  
Pin #  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIMVCC  
SIMRST  
SIMCLK  
SIMDAT  
SIMPRESENCE  
SIMGND  
SIMGND  
U10  
EAR  
SIM Holder  
Connector for SIM card. Signals are also  
present at test connector J5, described  
above  
3.5mm2-pole Audio output (unbalanced) or Audio From  
jack socket  
Mobile Station (AFMS). Make sure jumpers  
are in place between pins 48 & 50 and  
between pins 47 & 49  
ground signal  
MIC  
3.5mm2-pole Audio input (unbalanced) or Audio To  
jack socket  
Mobile Station (ATMS). Signal source must  
be AC-coupled as a bias voltage for  
electret microphones is provided  
(2.0 - 2.5Vd.c.). Make sure Jumpers are in  
place between pins 48 & 50 and between  
pins 47 & 49  
34  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
2. USING THE DEVELOPER’S KIT  
Connector  
Description  
Connections  
J10  
SYSTEM  
connector  
For optional flat cable connection between  
the module and the development board  
J11  
TEST  
connector  
60 pin, 2.54mm pitch, dual row pin header  
that carries all signals present at the system  
connector of the module. Used for easy  
testing of the signals (see Figure 2.4,  
J12  
Application  
connector  
For flat cable connection between a host  
application and the module. Most of the  
signals pass through jumpers that allow the  
developer to select whether a specific  
signal is routed to/from the development  
board or to/from the host application. If no  
application is connected to J12, these  
jumpers (SW1, SW3, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8,  
SW9, SW10 & SW11) serve as on/off switches  
for the module signals (see Figure 2.3,  
12v  
RF  
2.1mm DC  
Allows connection of an  
Power Socket external power supply.  
Between 10V and 15V d.c. at  
6 watts is required  
SMA panel  
socket  
Connect the supplied antenna  
35  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.4 System Connector Pin Assignments  
Refer to the table below when monitoring signals on, or connecting to,  
J10, J11 or J12. The table shows the system-connector pin assignments  
for the GM47 module.  
1
VCC  
VCC  
DGND  
DGND  
DGND  
DGND  
DGND  
DGND  
ON/OFF  
SIMPRESENCE  
SIMDAT  
DAC  
2
3
4
5
VCC  
6
J10, J11 & J12 pin  
numbering  
viewed from the  
front of the  
7
VCC  
8
9
VCC  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
52  
54  
56  
58  
60  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
51  
53  
55  
57  
59  
VCC  
developer’s box  
Reserved for future use  
SIMVCC  
SIMRST  
SIMCLK  
IO1  
1
2
IO2  
IO3  
IO4  
VRTC  
ADC1  
ADC2  
ADC3  
SDA  
SCL  
BUZZER  
LED  
OUT5  
VIO  
TX_ON  
DTR  
RI  
DCD  
RTS  
CTS  
TD (DTMS)  
TD3 (TX3)  
TD2 (CTMS)  
PCMULD  
PCMOUT  
PCMSYNC  
MICP  
RD (DFMS)  
RD3 (RX3)  
RD2 (CFMS)  
PCMDLD  
PCMIN  
PCMCLK  
MICN  
59  
60  
BEARP  
BEARN  
SERVICE  
AGND  
AFMS  
ATMS  
Figure 2.4 System connector pin assignments  
36  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
Part 3: Integrating the  
Module  
Product Photo/Illustration  
   
1. Mechanical Description  
1.1 Interface Description  
The pictures below show the mechanical design of the GM47 along  
with the positions of the different connectors and mounting holes. The  
GM47 is protected with AISI 304 stainless steel covers that meet the  
environmental and EMC requirements.  
Mounting hole/ground connection  
System connector  
Antenna connector  
Figure 1.1 GM47 viewed from below  
Figure 1.2 GM47, viewed from above  
Please note the following:  
• Mounting holes positioned at the corners make it possible to  
securely bolt the module into your application.  
39  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
• Keypad, display, microphone, speaker and battery are not part of the  
module.  
• The SIM card is mounted in your application, external to the  
module.  
• The System Connector is a 60-pin, standard 0.05in (1.27mm) pitch  
type. The pins and their electrical characteristics are described in  
• Information about the Antenna Connector is found in  
1.2 Physical Dimensions  
2.20 (4x)  
2.86  
4.78  
3.80  
2.05  
7.15 2.90  
4.60  
3.00  
2.80  
50.00  
33.00  
30.20  
2.30  
9.00  
46.40  
1.80  
Figure 1.3 Dimensions of the GM47  
Measurements are given in millimetres. See also “Technical Data”,  
40  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
2. System Connector Interface  
2.1 Overview  
Electrical connections to the module (except the antenna), are made  
through the System Connector Interface. The system connector is a  
60-pin, standard 0.05in (1.27mm) pitch device.  
The system connector allows both board-to-board and board-to-cable  
connections to be made. Use a board-board connector to connect the  
module directly to a PCB, and a board-cable connector to connect the  
module via a cable.  
Figure 2.1 below shows the numbering of the connector pins.  
A ground connection is provided at the mounting hole next to the RF  
connector on the module as shown below. Connect this ground point to  
the DGND pins of the module by the shortest, low-impedance path  
possible. The purpose of this connection is to allow any ESD picked up  
by the antenna to bypass the module’s internal ground path.  
Ground  
connection  
Pin 59  
Pin 1  
Pin 60  
Pin 2  
Figure 2.1 GM47, viewed from underneath  
41  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
The following table gives the pin assignments for the system connector  
interface and a short description for each signal.  
Note!  
Under the heading “Dir” in the table, module input and output signals  
are indicated by the letters I and O respectively.  
Pin  
Signal Name  
Dir  
Signal Type  
Description  
1
VCC  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Supply  
Power supply  
Digital ground  
Power supply  
Digital ground  
Power supply  
Digital ground  
Power supply  
Digital ground  
Power supply  
Digital ground  
Power supply  
Digital ground  
2
DGND  
VCC  
-
3
Supply  
4
DGND  
VCC  
-
5
Supply  
6
DGND  
VCC  
-
7
Supply  
8
DGND  
VCC  
-
9
Supply  
10  
11  
12  
13  
DGND  
VCC  
-
Supply  
-
DGND  
Reserved for  
future use  
14  
15  
16  
ON/OFF  
I
Internal pull  
Turns the module on and off.  
up, open drain Former WAKE_B  
SIMVCC  
-
I
Digital 3V/5V  
SIM card power supply. Power output  
from module for SIM Card  
SIMPRESENCE  
Internal pull  
SIM Presence  
up, open drain A “1” indicates that the SIM is missing; a  
“0” that it is inserted  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
SIMRST  
SIMDATA  
SIMCLK  
DAC  
O
Digital 3V/5V  
Digital 3V/5V  
Digital 3V/5V  
Analogue  
SIM card reset  
I/O  
O
SIM card data  
SIM card clock  
O
Digital to analogue converter  
General purpose input/output 1  
General purpose input/output 2  
General purpose input/output 3  
General purpose input/output 4  
Supply for real time clock  
Analogue to digital converter 1  
Analogue to digital converter 2  
IO1  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Supply 1.8V  
Analogue  
IO2  
IO3  
IO4  
VRTC  
ADC1  
ADC2  
I
I
Analogue  
42  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
Pin  
Signal Name  
Dir  
Signal Type  
Description  
28  
29  
ADC3  
SDA  
I
Analogue  
Analogue to digital converter 3  
2
I/O  
2.75, internal  
pull up  
I C data  
2
30  
SCL  
O
2.75, internal  
pull up  
I C clock  
31  
32  
33  
34  
BUZZER  
OUT5  
LED  
O
O
O
O
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Buzzer output from module  
Programmable output 5  
Flashing LED  
VIO  
Power Out  
2.75V  
Module power indication. VIO is a  
2.75V at 75mA output supply that can  
be used to power external circuitry that  
interfaces to the GM47  
35  
TX_ON  
O
Digital 2.75  
This output indicates when the GSM  
module is going to transmit the burst  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
RI  
O
I
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Ring Indicator (UART1)  
DTR  
DCD  
RTS  
CTS  
TD  
Data Terminal Ready (UART1)  
Data Carrier Detect (UART1)  
Request To Send (UART1)  
Clear To Send (UART1)  
O
I
O
I
Transmitted Data (UART1).  
Data from DTE (host) to DCE (module).  
Former DTMS  
42  
RD  
O
Digital 2.75  
Received Data (UART1).  
Data from DCE (module) to DTE (host).  
Formerly DFMS  
43  
44  
45  
TD3  
RD3  
TD2  
I
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
UART3 transmission  
UART3 reception  
O
I
UART2 transmission. Used for flashing  
the memory. Former CTMS  
46  
RD2  
O
Digital 2.75  
UART2 Reception. Used for flashing the  
memory. Former CFMS  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
PCMULD  
PCMDLD  
PCMOUT  
PCMIN  
I
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Digital 2.75  
Analogue  
Analogue  
Analogue  
DSP PCM digital audio input  
DSP PCM digital audio output  
Codec PCM digital audio output  
Codec PCM digital audio input  
DSP PCM frame sync  
O
O
I
PCMSYNC  
PCMCLK  
MICP  
O
O
I
DSP PCM clock output  
Microphone Input positive  
Microphone Input negative  
Speaker output positive  
MICN  
I
BEARP  
O
43  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Pin  
Signal Name  
Dir  
Signal Type  
Description  
56  
57  
58  
BEARN  
AFMS  
O
O
I
Analogue  
Analogue  
2.7V  
Speaker output negative  
Audio output from module  
SERVICE  
Flash programming voltage for the MS.  
Enable logger information if not  
flashing. Formerly VPPFLASH  
59  
60  
ATMS  
I
Analogue  
-
Audio input to module  
Analogue ground  
AGND  
-
2.2 General Electrical and Logical Characteristics  
Many of the signals, as indicated in the table above, are high-speed  
CMOS logic inputs or outputs powered from a 2.75V±5% internal  
voltage regulator, and are defined as Digital 2.75V. Whenever a signal  
is defined as Digital 2.75V, the following electrical characteristics  
apply.  
Parameter  
High Level Output Voltage (V ), I = –2mA  
Min.  
2.2  
0
Max.  
2.75  
0.6  
Units  
V
OH  
o
Low Level Output Voltage (V ), I = 2mA  
V
OL  
o
High Level Input Voltage (V )  
1.93  
0
2.75  
0.8  
V
IH  
Low Level Input voltage (V )  
V
IL  
Note!  
Unused pins can be left floating.  
2.2.1 General Protection Requirements  
• All 2.75V digital inputs will continuously withstand and suffer no  
damage in the power-on or power-off condition when subjected to  
any voltage from -0.5V to 3.47V (3.3V+5%).  
• All 2.75V digital outputs will continuously withstand a short circuit  
to any other voltage within the range 0V to 3V.  
• All analogue outputs will continuously withstand a short circuit to  
any voltage within the range 0V to 3V.  
• The SIM output signals and the SIMVCC supply will continuously  
withstand a short circuit to any voltage within the range 0V to 5.8V.  
44  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
2.3 Grounds  
Pin  
Signal  
Description  
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12  
60  
DGND  
AGND  
Digital ground  
Analogue ground  
There are two ground connections in the GM47, AGND (analogue  
ground) and DGND (digital ground). Pin assignments are shown in the  
table above.  
Note!  
AGND and DGND are connected at a star point inside the module. They  
must not be joined together in your application.  
2.3.1 Analogue Ground - AGND  
AGND is the return signal, or analogue audio reference, for ATMS  
(Audio To Mobile Station) and AFMS (Audio From Mobile Station).  
Parameter  
Limit  
I
12.5mA  
max  
2.3.2 Digital Ground - DGND  
DGND is the reference or return signal for all system interface digital  
signals and is also the d.c. return for SERVICE and the power supply,  
VCC. Connect all DGND pins together in your application in order to  
carry the current drawn by the module.  
2.4 VCC - Regulated Power Supply Input  
Pins  
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11  
Signal  
VCC  
Description  
regulated power supply input  
Power is supplied to the module VCC pins, from an external source.  
Connect all VCC pins together in your application in order to carry the  
current drawn by the module.  
45  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
The electrical characteristics for VCC are shown in the table below.  
Parameter  
Mode  
Limit  
Nominal  
3.6V  
Tolerance  
including ripple  
3.4V - 4.0V  
a
Vcc supply voltage  
Over-voltage limit  
Maximum ripple  
Burst transmission  
5.5V  
TBD  
Maximum allowable voltage  
drop  
200mV  
<350mA (average)  
<2A (peak)  
Current drawn, at full TX  
power  
a. Measured at system connector pins.  
Note!  
GM47 has no internal capacitance to supply the large current peaks  
during GSM burst transmission. We recommend you follow these  
general guidelines:  
• Fit a low ESR electrolytic capacitor close to the module:  
> 1,000µF;  
<100mESR.  
• Make sure power supply to module line resistance is <200mΩ.  
2.5 ON/OFF and External Power Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Dir  
Description  
14  
34  
ON/OFF  
VIO  
I
Pulse signal to turn the module on or off  
2.75V supplied by the module  
O
2.5.1 Switching the module ON and OFF  
The module is turned on and off by momentarily grounding the  
ON/OFF pin. This input should be driven by an open collector, or other  
device which will not tie the input high, to allow the internal alarm clock  
function to operate. See the table below for exact characteristics. In the  
OFF state the current consumption of the module is less than 100µA.  
The ON/OFF signal is a digital input with the following characteristics:  
Parameter  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Units  
Voltage HIGH level (FALSE)  
Voltage LOW level (TRUE)  
Pull-up resistance (internal)  
VCC  
V
0
0.3 x VCC  
39  
V
kΩ  
46  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
The following timing diagram illustrates both power-up and power-  
down processes.  
Module on  
Module off  
t1  
t2  
ON/OFF  
VIO  
tpwr  
Module  
powered  
Module power-up  
Module power-down  
Figure 2.2 ON/OFF timing and VIO performance  
Times are defined as follows:  
Time  
Description  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Units  
t
Turn-on pulse time  
Turn-off pulse time  
Hardware-reset pulse time  
2  
s
1
1  
s
s
t2  
a
>10  
tpwr  
Time for VIO and internal voltages  
to be established  
100  
200  
ms  
a. Active only when a full system reset is required.  
2.5.2 VIO - 2.75V Supply  
VIO provides an output voltage derived from an internal 2.75V  
regulator. Its electrical characteristics are shown below.  
Parameter  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
2.85  
75  
Units  
Output Voltage (I  
Load current  
= 50mA) 2.70  
2.75  
V
load  
mA  
You can use this output for the following:  
• to indicate that the module is alive;  
• to power interface circuits, external to the module.  
47  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.6 Analogue Audio  
Pin  
Signal  
Dir  
Description  
57  
59  
60  
AFMS  
ATMS  
AGND  
O
I
Audio from mobile station  
Audio to mobile station  
-
Ground (return) for analogue audio  
ATMS is the audio input, and AFMS is the audio output, of the module.  
These signals can be used in Hands-free or Portable Hands-free mode.  
Hands-free Mode  
This mode is used for audio accessories, such as car kits and hands-free  
equipment.  
Portable Hands-free Mode  
This is the default mode. It activates a different amplification factor in  
the ME, and activates a 2V microphone bias level for ATMS. The bias  
level is adjustable using AT*E2EAMS.  
2.6.1 Audio To Mobile Station - ATMS  
ATMS is the analogue audio input to the module. Internally, the signal  
is sent to the CODEC (COder/DECoder), where it is converted to digital  
audio in PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) format. The encoded audio is  
sent to PCMOUT via the internal PCM bus.  
ATMS provides a DC bias when it is used as the microphone input in  
Portable Hands-free applications. All other sources must be  
a.c.-coupled to avoid attenuation of low frequencies, and to prevent  
incorrect biasing or damage to the ATMS input. Use a capacitor greater  
than the value shown in the table below.  
The ATMS input is a passive network followed by the transmit part of  
the CODEC.  
Parameter  
Limit  
Application driving impedance (0.3 - 3.5kHz)  
300Ω  
a
1µF  
AC coupling capacitance  
Module input impedance (0.3 - 3.5kHz)  
Low frequency cut-off (-3dB)  
>50kΩ  
300Hz ± 50Hz  
48  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
Parameter  
Limit  
High frequency cut-off (–3dB)  
Hands-free mode  
Portable hands-free mode  
Additional Gain in Portable hands-free mode  
> 3500Hz ± 50Hz  
0V  
Output d.c. bias level  
2.0V ± 0.1V  
28.5dB  
a. The a.c.-coupling capacitance must be supplied by your application, unless  
a d.c.-coupled microphone is used.  
The following tables show the nominal PGA (programming gain  
settings). For more information see the relevant AT commands.  
Maximum input voltage limit: 245mV  
rms  
Input  
Input (mV  
)
TXAGC (dB)  
AUX AMP  
PCMOUT (dBm0)  
rms  
gain  
ATMS  
245  
0
13  
3
Maximum input level at MICI, 61.4mV output at  
rms  
PCMOUT = 3dBm0  
Input  
Differential  
TXAGC (dB)  
AUX AMP  
gain  
PCMOUT (dBm0)  
input (mV  
)
rms  
MICN  
MICP  
61.4  
0
25  
3
Output at AFMS for 3dBm0 at PCMIN  
Input  
dBm0  
RXPGA  
Volume  
AFMS (mV  
)
rms  
control (dB)  
PCMIN  
3
0
0
436  
Output at BEARN/BEARP for 3dBm0 at PCMIN  
Input  
dBm0  
RXPGA  
Volume  
BEAR (mV  
)
rms  
control (dB)  
PCMIN  
3
0
0
388  
2.6.2 Audio From Mobile Station - AFMS  
AFMS is the analogue audio output from the module and may be used  
to drive a speaker or the ear-piece in a portable hands-free accessory.  
PCM digital audio signals, entering the module through the PCMIN pin,  
are translated to analogue signals by the CODEC. See “2.7 PCM Digital  
Audio”, page 52 for further information.  
49  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
The table below shows the audio signal levels for AFMS.  
Parameter  
Limit  
Speaker impedance  
Output Capacitance  
64to 1kΩ  
2.2µF ±10%  
Drive capability into 5kΩ  
>2.4V  
>2.2V  
>1.3V  
p-p  
p-p  
p-p  
(0.3 - 3.5kHz)  
Drive capability into 1.5kΩ  
(0.3 - 3.5kHz)  
Levels (THD <5%)  
Drive capability into 150Ω  
(at 1kHz)  
2.6.3 Microphone Signals  
Pin  
Speaker signals  
Dir  
Function  
53  
54  
MICP  
MICN  
I
I
Microphone positive input  
Microphone negative input  
MICP and MICN are balanced differential microphone input pins.  
These inputs are compatible with an electret microphone. The  
microphone contains an FET buffer with an open drain output, which is  
supplied with at least +2V relative to ground by the module as shown  
below.  
1k  
MICP  
2 - 2.5V  
@ 1mA  
68nF  
68nF  
CODEC  
MICN  
1k  
GM47  
AGND  
Figure 2.3 Microphone connections to the module  
50  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
2.6.4 Speaker Signals  
Pin  
Speaker signals  
Dir  
Function  
55  
56  
BEARP  
BEARN  
O
O
Speaker positive output  
Speaker negative output  
BEARP and BEARN are the speaker output pins. These are  
differential-mode outputs. The electrical characteristics are given in the  
table below.  
Parameter  
Limit  
Output level (differential)  
Output level (dynamic load = 32)  
4.0Vpp  
2.8Vpp  
–9dB ± 1  
a
Gain PCMIN to BEARP/BEARN (differential)  
Distortion at 1kHz and maximum output level  
Offset, BEARP to BEARN  
5%  
±30mV  
40dB  
Ear-piece mute-switch attenuation  
The following table shows the ear piece impedances that can be  
connected to BEARP and BEARN.  
Ear piece model  
Impedance  
Tolerance  
Dynamic ear piece  
Dynamic ear piece  
Piezo ear piece  
[32+ 800µH] // 100pF  
[150+ 800µH] // 100pF  
1k+ 60nF  
±20%  
±20%  
±20%  
51  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.7 PCM Digital Audio  
Pin  
Signal  
Dir  
Function  
52  
51  
47  
48  
50  
49  
PCMCLK  
PCMSYNC  
PCMULD  
PCMDLD  
PCMIN  
O
O
I
PCM clock  
PCM frame sync  
PCM audio input to DSP  
PCM audio output from DSP  
PCM audio input to Codec  
PCM audio output to Codec  
O
I
PCMOUT  
O
Figure 2.4 shows the PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio  
connection for external devices. These connections can be used to  
process PCM digital audio signals, bypassing the module’s internal  
analogue audio CODEC.  
GM47  
PCMSYNC & PCMCLK  
PCMDLD  
PCMULD  
PCMIN  
DSP  
CODEC  
PCMOUT  
System connector  
Analogue  
audio  
signals  
Link for internal  
digital-audio processing  
Figure 2.4 Pin connections to digital audio  
Note!  
When no external audio processing is performed, the following pins  
must be connected together:  
• PCMDLD to PCMIN  
• PCMULD to PCMOUT  
Electrical characteristics  
Digital 2.75V CMOS input/output electrical characteristics apply.  
52  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
2.7.1 PCM Data Format  
All of the module’s PCM signals, including signals between its CODEC  
and DSP conform to the PCM data I/O format of the industry standard  
DSP from Texas Instruments.  
PCMCLK (bit clock) and PCMSYNC (frame syncronisation) are both  
generated by the DSP within the module.  
The DSP within the module is the master therefore all external PCM  
clocks and data from external devices must be synchronized to it  
13-Bit PCM Mode  
Bit  
Contents  
D15 to D14  
D13 to D1  
D0  
Equal to D13  
Two's complement of the 13-bit PCM  
LSB, not used  
The module implements 13-bit PCM with the 13-bit data embedded in  
a 16-bit word within a 24-bit frame (see Figure 2.6). Each PCM word  
contains 16-bits: D0 to D15. D13 to D1 is the two’s complement value  
of the 13-bit PCM, with D13 as the sign bit. D14 and D15 are always  
set to be equivalent with D13. D0, the LSB, is not used as shown in  
= D13  
13 bit PCM  
D0  
MSB D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 LSB  
16 bit data word  
Figure 2.5 16-bit data word format  
16-Bit PCM Mode  
Bit  
D15 - D0  
Contents  
Two's complement  
The frame format is equal to the one shown in Figure 2.5, but with D15,  
D14 and D0 filled with significant bits. D0 is the two’s compliment  
value of the 16-bit PCM with bit 15 as the sign bit.  
53  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
PCM Timing Diagrams  
The PCM timing is shown in Figure 2.6 below and it is seen that the  
CPU has 45µs to serve an interrupt and setup data channels. Data is sent  
on the falling edge of the sync pulse. The data bits in PCMULD and  
PCMDLD are aligned so that the MSB in each word occurs on the same  
clock edge as shown in Figure 2.7.  
125 µs  
Clk  
Sync  
Data  
45 µs  
Figure 2.6 16-bit word within 24-bit frame  
PCM signal timing is shown in Figure 2.7. The signals characteristics  
PCMCLK  
tPSS  
PCMSYN  
PCMIN  
tPSH  
tDSH  
tDSL  
MSB  
D14  
D13  
tPDLP  
D14  
PCMOUT  
X
MSB  
D13  
Figure 2.7 PCM Timing Diagram  
Name  
Description  
Typ.  
2.5  
5
Unit  
µs  
t
t
t
t
t
PCMSYN (setup) to PCMCLK (fall)  
PCMSYN pulse length  
PSS  
µs  
PSH  
DSL  
PCMI (setup) to PCMCLK (fall)  
PCMI (hold) from PCMCLK (fall)  
PCMO valid from PCMCLK (rise)  
2.5  
2.5  
2.5  
µs  
µs  
DSH  
PDLP  
µs  
Name  
Description  
Typ.  
200  
5
Unit  
kHz  
µs  
F
PCM clock frequency  
PCMCLK  
T
PCM clock period with 50/50 mark space ratio  
PCM sync frequency  
PCMCLK  
F
8
kHz  
PCMSYN  
54  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
Typical Rise/Fall times  
Rise Time  
Fall Time  
Unit  
PCMCLK  
PCMSYN  
PCMOUT  
PCMDLD  
19  
18  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
19  
15  
900  
20  
900  
19  
2.8 Serial Data Interfaces  
Pin  
Signal  
Dir  
Description  
RS232  
CCITT Nº  
41  
42  
39  
40  
37  
38  
36  
45  
46  
43  
44  
TD  
I
Serial data to module (UART1)  
Serial data from module (UART1)  
Request To Send (UART1)  
Clear To Send (UART1)  
103  
104  
105  
106  
108.2  
109  
125  
RD  
O
I
RTS  
CTS  
DTR  
DCD  
RI  
O
I
Data Terminal Ready (UART1)  
Data Carrier Detect (UART1)  
Ring Indicator (UART1)  
O
O
I
TD2  
RD2  
TD3  
RD3  
UART2 Data Transmission  
UART2 Data Reception  
O
I
UART3 Data Transmission  
UART3 Data Reception  
O
The serial channels, consisting of three UARTs, are asynchronous  
communication links to the application or accessory units. UART1 has  
RS-232 functionality. UART2 and UART3 behave as general-purpose  
serial data links. In addition they are used for accessories and GPS  
respectively.  
Digital 2.75V CMOS input/output electrical characteristics apply.  
The standard character format consists of 1 start bit, 8 bit data, no parity  
and 1 stop bit. In all, there are 10 bits per character.  
2.8.1 UART1 (RS232) - RD, TD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD and RI  
UART1 signals conform to a 9-pin RS232 (V.24) serial port, except for  
o
the DSR (CCITT N 107) signal. The DSR signal has been removed as  
it is usually connected to DTR in most systems.  
55  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Note!  
UART1 signal levels do not match standard RS232 (V.28) levels. The  
relationship between the levels is shown in the table below.  
RS232 level  
RD, TD  
RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI  
CMOS level  
<– 3V  
>+3V  
1
0
OFF  
ON  
>1.93V  
<0.80V  
Conversion between the module CMOS levels and RS232 levels can be  
achieved using a standard interface IC, such as the Maxim Integrated  
Products MAX3237.  
2.8.2 Serial Data Signals - RD, TD  
The default baud rate is 9.6kbits/s, however higher bit rates of up to  
460 kbits/s are supported, set by an AT command. UART1 starts at a  
rate of 9.6kbits/s in standard AT command mode. The module also  
supports GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol and starts when the  
appropriate command is sent.  
Serial Data From Module (RD)  
RD is an output signal that the module uses to send data via UART1 to  
the application.  
Parameter  
Limit  
Application load resistance  
100kΩ  
Application load capacitance  
<100pF  
Serial Data To Module (TD)  
TD is an input signal, used by the application to send data via UART1  
to the module.  
Parameter  
Limit  
Application driving impedance  
Input capacitance  
<100Ω  
<100pF  
Input resistance  
<100in series, with 100kto DGND  
2.8.3 Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI  
UART1 control signals are active low and need a standard interface IC,  
such as the MAX3237, to generate standard RS232 levels.  
UART1 converted signals, together with DGND, RD and TD form a  
9-pin RS232 data port.  
56  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
RTS and CTS are capable of transmitting at 1/10th of the data  
transmission speed for data rates up to 460kbit/s (byte-oriented flow  
control mechanism).  
Note!  
When hardware flow control is not used in communications between  
the application and the module, RTS and CTS must to be connected to  
each other at the module.  
Switching times for RTS and CTS  
The table below shows the switching times.  
Parameter  
Limit  
Time from Low to High level  
Time from High to Low level  
<2µs  
<2µs  
Request to Send (RTS)  
Used to condition the DCE for data transmission. The default level is  
high by internal pull up.  
The application must pull RTS low to enable data transmission from the  
module. Similarly, the module asserts CTS low, indicating it is ready to  
receive data transmission from the host.  
Parameter  
Limit  
Application driving impedance  
Input capacitance  
<100Ω  
<2nF  
Input resistance (pull-up)  
100kto VCC  
Clear To Send (CTS)  
CTS is asserted by the DCE to indicate that the host (DTE) may transmit  
data. When CTS is high, the host (DTE) is not permitted to transmit  
data.  
The table below shows the load characteristics for this signal.  
Parameter  
Limit  
Application load capacitance  
Application load resistance  
<500pF  
1MΩ  
57  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)  
DTR indicates that the DTE is ready to receive data. It also acts as a  
hardware ‘hang-up’, terminating calls when switched high. The signal  
is active low. You can define the exact behaviour of DTR with an AT  
command.  
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)  
DCD indicates that the DCE is receiving a valid carrier (data signal)  
when low.  
Ring Indicator (RI)  
RI indicates that a ringing signal is being received by the DCE when  
low. You can define the exact behaviour of RI with an AT command.  
Data Set Ready (DSR)  
No DSR signal is provided. Use any DGND connection for this  
functionality.  
2.8.4 UART2 - TD2, RD2  
UART 2 consists of a full duplex serial communication port with  
transmission and reception lines.  
This communication port works in a mode called Operation and  
Maintenance.  
Operation and Maintenance mode works in combination with the  
SERVICE signal. Two events are possible if the SERVICE signal is  
active when the module is turned on. These are:  
• the module is reprogrammed if UART2 is connected to a computer  
running Sony Ericsson update software;  
• the module enters logging mode and sends data to UART2 if no  
reprogramming information is received.  
Timing and electrical signals characteristics are the same as for  
UART1, TD and RD.  
Transmitted Data 2 (TD2)  
TD2 is used by the application to send data to the module via UART2.  
It has the same electrical characteristics as TD.  
Received Data 2 (RD2)  
RD2 is used to send data to the application via UART2. It has the same  
electrical characteristics as RD.  
58  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
2.8.5 UART3 - TD3, RD3 (designated for future use)  
UART3 is a full duplex serial communication port with transmission  
and reception lines. It has the same timing and electrical signal  
characteristics as UART1, TD and RD.  
Transmitted Data 3 (TD3)  
TD3 is used by your application to send data to the module via UART3.  
Received Data 3 (RD3)  
RD is used to send data to your application via UART3.  
2.9 SIM Card Related Signals  
Pin  
15  
Signal  
SIMVCC  
Dir  
Description  
-
SIM card power supply  
SIM card presence  
SIM card reset  
16  
17  
19  
18  
SIMPRESENCE  
SIMRST  
I
O
O
SIMCLK  
SIM card clock  
SIMDATA  
I/O SIM card data  
These connections allow you to communicate with the SIM card holder  
in you application.  
Note!  
The distance between the SIM card holder and the module can be up to  
25cm.  
This SIM interface allows the use of 3V and 5V SIM cards. By default  
it works on 3V levels but will automatically switch to 5V, if a 5V SIM  
card is fitted.  
59  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
SIM voltage levels, as shown in the following table, are dependent on  
the type of SIM card detected by the module.  
Signal  
Parameter  
Mode  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Unit  
3V  
5V  
3V  
5V  
3V  
5V  
3V  
5V  
3V  
5V  
3V  
5V  
3V  
5V  
2.7  
4.5  
2.1  
3.5  
0
3.0  
5.0  
3.3  
5.5  
3.0  
5.0  
0.9  
1.5  
3.0  
5.0  
0.2  
0.2  
3.0  
5.0  
0.35  
0.3  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
SIMVCC  
SIM supply voltage  
High Level Input  
voltage (VIH)  
SIMDAT  
SIMDAT  
SIMDAT  
SIMDAT  
Low Level Input  
voltage (VIL)  
0
2.7  
4.7  
0
High Level Output  
voltage (VOH  
)
Low Level Output  
voltage (VOL  
)
0
2.4  
4.4  
0
High Level Output  
voltage (VOH  
SIMCLK  
SIMRST  
)
Low Level Output  
voltage (VOL  
SIMCLK  
SIMRST  
)
0
2.9.1 SIM Detection - SIMPRESENCE  
SIMPRESENCE is used to determine whether a SIM card has been  
inserted into or removed from the SIM card holder. You should  
normally wire it to the “card inserted switch” of the SIM card holder,  
but different implementations are possible.  
When left open, an internal pull-up resistor maintains the signal high  
and means “SIM card missing” to the module. When pulled low the  
module assumes a SIM card is inserted.  
SIMPRESENCE is a Digital 2.75 CMOS input with the following  
electrical characteristics.  
Parameter  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Units  
Pull-up resistance (at 2.75 V)  
100  
kΩ  
V
Low Level Input voltage (SIM inserted)  
High Level Input voltage (SIM missing)  
0.80  
2.75  
>1.93  
V
Note!  
To meet regulatory approvals SIMPRESENCE must be implemented.  
60  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
2.10 Service/Programming  
Pin  
Signal  
Dir  
Description  
58  
SERVICE  
I
Flash programming voltage  
When the SERVICE input signal is active the module will:  
• be reprogrammed if data is received through UART2 from a  
computer running Sony Ericsson reprogramming software;  
• or it will output logging data on UART2.  
The electrical characteristics are given below. The signal reference is  
DGND.  
SERVICE Voltage (V)  
Mode  
Drive Capacity  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Normal Operation  
0.8  
-
Service/enable  
programming  
1.9  
2.75  
13.6  
>1mA  
2.11 Buzzer  
Pin  
Signal  
Dir  
Description  
31  
BUZZER  
O
Buzzer output from module  
Connecting the BUZZER signal to an inverting transistor-buffer  
followed by a piezoelectric transducer enables the module to play pre-  
programmed melodies or sounds.  
2.12 LED  
Pin  
Signal  
Dir  
Description  
33  
LED  
O
LED Output from module  
The LED states shown below, are hard coded.  
LED indication  
Operational status  
No indication  
Green, steady  
Green, blinking  
No power or in the OFF state  
Power on, not connected to a network  
Power on, connected to a network  
61  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
The following circuit should be used to connect an LED.  
220  
VIO  
GM47  
2k2  
LED  
BC817  
10k  
DGND  
Figure 2.8 Electrical connections for the LED  
2.13 General Purpose Digital I/O Ports  
Pin  
I/O port  
signal  
Default  
signal  
Description  
21  
22  
23  
24  
37  
32  
36  
IO1  
-
Programmable Input/Output 1  
Programmable Input/Output 2  
Programmable Input/Output 3  
Programmable Input/Output 4  
Programmable input 5/Data Terminal Ready  
Programmable output 5  
IO2  
-
IO3  
-
IO4  
-
IN5  
DTR  
-
OUT5  
OUT6  
RI  
Programmable Output 6/Data Carrier  
Detect  
38  
OUT7  
DCD  
Programmable Output 7/Ring indicator  
Signals which have an entry in the Default Signal column in the above  
table are multiplexed. Their operation depends on AT commands.  
The following table gives you the input impedance. These values only  
apply when the signals are configured as input signals.  
Parameter  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Units  
Input impedance (IO1 - IO4) (pull-up)  
Input impedance (IN5)  
20  
39  
100  
kΩ  
100  
kΩ  
62  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
2.14 General Purpose Analogue I/O Ports  
Pin  
Signal  
Dir  
Description  
20  
26  
27  
28  
DAC  
O
Digital to analogue conversion output  
Analogue to digital conversion input 1  
Analogue to digital conversion input 2  
Analogue to digital conversion input 3  
ADC1  
ADC2  
ADC3  
I
I
I
The module is able to convert digital to analogue signals and vice versa.  
2.14.1 Digital to Analogue Converter - DAC  
The DAC is an 8-bit converter. Conversion takes place when an AT  
command is sent to the module. The module sends the resulting  
analogue value to the DAC pin.  
DAC output electrical characteristics are given in the following table.  
Parameter  
Limit  
Units  
Resolution  
8
Bits  
V
a
Output voltage for code = 0  
(2.75 x 0.05) ± 0.05  
Output voltage for code = 255  
Nominal step size  
V
(2.75 x 0.95) ± 0.05  
mV  
mV  
(2.75 x 0.9)/256  
b
± 0.5  
Absolute error  
Output wide-band noise and clock  
feed-through 0-1.1MHz  
0.5  
mV  
rms  
Power-supply rejection ratio 50Hz - 10kHz  
40  
dB  
ms  
c
2 (Load A)  
Conversion rate ± 0.5LSB  
ms  
50 (Load B)  
Output buffer impedance when disabled  
Output current source or sink  
50  
1  
kΩ  
mA  
mA  
Current consumption (active)  
1.0  
a. Tolerance on this internal voltage is ±5%  
b. Referred to the ideal conversion characteristic.  
63  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
DAC  
100 - 200pF  
100k  
Load A  
DGND  
DAC  
10nF  
1nF  
Load B  
1k  
DGND  
Figure 2.9 DAC loads  
2.14.2 Analogue to Digital Converters 1, 2 and 3 - ADCx  
The ADC is an 8-bit converter. An analogue value applied to any of the  
ADC pins is converted and stored in a register inside the module. When  
the appropriate AT command is received by the module, the digital  
value stored in the register is read.  
ADC electrical characteristics are shown in the table below.  
Parameter  
Min.  
Max.  
Units  
Resolution  
8
0
8
Bits  
V
a
Input voltage for 0000 0000 word  
0.01 x 2.75  
Input voltage for 1111 1111 word  
V
0.99 x 2.75  
2.75  
Differential Non-Linearity (DNL)  
Overall Non-Linearity (INL)  
Absolute accuracy  
±0.75  
±0.60  
±1.5  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
MΩ  
mA  
Input impedance  
1
Average supply current  
(continuous conversion)  
1
External source impedance  
50  
kΩ  
a. Tolerance on this internal voltage is ±5%  
64  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
2.15 External I 2C Serial Control Bus  
2
Note!  
The I C bus is currently not supported by the software  
Pin  
29  
30  
Signal  
SDA  
Dir  
I/O  
O
Description  
2
I C serial data  
2
SCL  
I C serial clock  
2
The external I C bus consists of two signals, SDA and SCL. This bus  
2
is isolated from the module’s internal I C bus to ensure proper  
2
operation of the module, even if the external I C bus is damaged.  
The electrical characteristics are shown below.  
Parameter  
Min.  
81.25  
1.2  
Typ.  
Max.  
Units  
kHz  
µs  
2
400  
Frequency I C CLK  
2
High or low I C CLK  
2
308  
308-  
1230  
ns  
Delay time after falling edge of I C  
CLK  
2
0
ns  
Hold time after falling edge of I C  
CLK  
2
400  
kHz  
µs  
Frequency I C CLK  
2
1.2  
High or low I C CLK  
2
100  
ns  
Delay time after falling edge of I C  
CLK  
2
0
ns  
Hold time after falling edge of I C  
CLK  
2.16 TX_ON - Burst Transmission  
Pin  
Signal  
Dir  
Description  
GSM module to transmit  
35  
TX_ON  
O
Burst transmission is the time when a GSM transceiver unit is  
transmitting RF signals. TX_ON indicates the module is going into  
transmission mode.  
65  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.17 Real Time Clock  
Pin  
Signal  
Dir  
Description  
25  
VRTC  
-
Voltage for the Real Time Clock  
The Real Time Clock (RTC) provides the main microprocessor with a  
time-of-day calendar and alarm, and a one-hundred-year calendar. It’s  
accuracy is shown in the table below  
Parameter  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Units  
RTC accuracy  
20 (52)  
40 (104)  
ppm (s/month)  
The Real Time Clock operates in two modes when connected to a  
separate power supply:  
• RTC normal mode: the module is in ON or OFF mode and it is  
supplied with power (VCC is applied).  
• RTC back-up mode: VCC is disconnected and the RTC is  
maintained by a separate backup power supply connected to the  
VRTC input (see Figure 2.10 below).  
Backup power is provided by a capacitor, golden-capacitor or battery in  
your application and must be connected to the VRTC pin. During RTC  
normal operation, the back up source will be charged.  
In back-up mode, the back-up source must provide enough power for  
RTC operation. Refer to the table for the amount of current required.  
The following table shows voltage characteristics for both modes.  
Parameter  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Units  
Supply Voltage RTC (normal mode -  
charging the capacitor)  
1.6  
1.8  
2.0  
V
Supply Voltage RTC (back-up mode -  
Capacitor provides the current)  
1.0  
1.8  
5.0  
2.0  
V
Current drawn  
10.0  
µA  
66  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE  
If the voltage drops below 1.0 V in back-up mode, the RTC will stop  
working. The following diagram shows the RTC connections.  
VRTC  
Backup  
supply  
GM47  
DGND  
+
Figure 2.10 RTC connections  
67  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3. Antenna Connector  
The module’s antenna connector allows transmission of the radio  
frequency (RF) signals from the module to an external customer-  
supplied antenna. The connector is a micro-miniature coaxial MMCX  
surface mounted component. A number of suitable MMCX type,  
mating plugs are available from the following manufacturers;  
• Amphenol;  
• Suhner;  
• IMS Connector Systems.  
The electrical characteristics of the antenna interface are shown below.  
Parameter  
Limit  
Description  
Nominal impedance  
50Ω  
2 Watt peak (Class 4)  
1 Watt peak (Class 1)  
Better than –102dBm  
Better than –102dBm  
Extended GSM900  
GSM1800  
Output Power  
Extended GSM900  
GSM1800  
Static Sensitivity  
68  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODULE  
4. Hints for Integrating the Module  
This chapter gives you advice and helpful hints on how to integrate the  
GM47 into your application from a hardware perspective.  
Please read and consider the information under the following headings  
before starting your integration work:  
• Safety advice and precautions.  
• Installation of the module.  
• Antenna.  
4.1 Safety Advice and Precautions  
4.1.1 General  
• Always ensure that use of the module is permitted. The module may  
present a hazard if used in proximity to personal medical electronic  
devices. As a rule, the module must not be used in hospitals, airports  
or planes.  
• You are responsible for observing your country’s safety standards,  
and where applicable the relevant wiring rules.  
• Never use the module at a gas station, refuelling point, blasting area  
or in any other environment where explosives may be present.  
• Operating the module close to other electronic devices, such as  
antennas, television sets, and radios may cause electromagnetic  
interference.  
• Never try to dismantle the module yourself. There are no  
components inside the module that can be serviced by the user. If  
you attempt to dismantle the module, you may invalidate the  
warranty.  
• To protect the power supply cables and meet the fire safety  
requirements, it is recommended that the electrical circuits are  
supplied with a power regulator. The power regulator should be  
placed as close to the terminals of the power supply as possible.  
• Do not connect any incompatible component or product to the  
GM47. Note, Sony Ericsson does not warrant against defects, non-  
conformities or deviations caused thereby.  
4.1.2 SIM Card  
• Before handling the SIM card in your application, ensure that you  
are not charged with static electricity. Use proper precautions to  
avoid electrostatic discharges. The module must be switched off  
before the SIM card is installed in your application.  
69  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
• When the SIM card hatch is opened, the SIM card connectors lie  
exposed under the SIM card holder. CAUTION: Do not touch these  
connectors! If you do, you may release an electrical discharge that  
could damage the module or the SIM card.  
• When designing your application, the SIM card’s accessibility  
should be taken into account. We always recommend that you have  
the SIM card protected by a PIN code. This will ensure that the SIM  
card cannot be used by an unauthorized person.  
4.1.3 Antenna  
• If the antenna is to be mounted outside, consider the risk of  
lightning. Follow the instructions provided by the antenna  
manufacturer.  
• Never connect more than one module to a single antenna. The  
module can be damaged by radio frequency energy from the  
transmitter of another module.  
• Like any mobile station, the antenna of the module emits radio  
frequency energy. To avoid EMI (electromagnetic interference), you  
must determine whether the application itself, or equipment in the  
application’s proximity, needs further protection against radio  
emission and the disturbances it might cause. Protection is secured  
either by shielding the surrounding electronics or by moving the  
antenna away from the electronics and the external signals cable.  
• The module and antenna may be damaged if either come into contact  
with ground potentials other than the one in your application.  
Beware, ground potential are not always what they appear to be.  
• In the final application, the antenna must be positioned more than  
20cm away from human bodies. When this rule cannot be applied,  
the application designer is responsible for providing the SAR  
measurement test report and declaration.  
4.2 Installation of the Module  
4.2.1 Where to Install the Module  
There are several conditions which need to be taken into consideration  
when designing your application as they might affect the module and its  
function. They are:  
Environmental Conditions  
The module must be installed so that the environmental conditions  
stated in the Technical Data chapter, such as temperature, humidity and  
vibration are satisfied. Additionally, the electrical specifications in the  
Technical Data section must not be exceeded.  
70  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODULE  
Signal Strength  
The module has to be placed in a way that ensures sufficient signal  
strength. To improve signal strength, the antenna can be moved to  
another position. Signal strength may depend on how close the module  
is to a radio base station. You must ensure that the location at which you  
intend to use the module, is within the network coverage area.  
Degradation in signal strength can be the result of a disturbance from  
another source, for example an electronic device in the immediate  
vicinity. More information about possible communication disturbances  
can be found in section 4.3.5, page 74.  
When an application is completed, you can verify signal strength by  
issuing the AT command AT+CSQ. See “AT+CSQ Signal Strength”,  
Tip!  
Before installing the module, use an ordinary mobile telephone to check  
a possible location for it. In determining the location for the module and  
antenna, you should consider signal strength as well as cable length  
Connection of Components to GM47  
The integrator is responsible for the final integrated system. Incorrectly  
designed or installed, external components may cause radiation limits to  
be exceeded. For instance, improperly made connections or improperly  
installed antennas can disturb the network and lead to malfunctions in  
the module or equipment.  
Network and Subscription  
• Before your application is used, you must ensure that your chosen  
network provides the necessary telecommunication services.  
Contact your service provider to obtain the necessary information.  
• If you intend to use SMS in the application, ensure this is included in  
your (voice) subscription.  
• Consider the choice of the supplementary services described in  
4.2.2 How to Install the Module  
Power Supply  
• Use a high-quality power supply cable with low resistance. This  
ensures that the voltages at the connector pins are within the allowed  
range, even during the maximum peak current. An electrolytic  
capacitor should be placed close to the power supply pins of the  
module to supply the peak currents during burst transmission. See  
71  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Grounds  
A ground connection is provided at the mounting hole next to the RF  
connector on the module (see Figure 2.1, page 41). Connect this ground  
point to the DGND pins of the module by the shortest, low-impedance  
path possible. The purpose of this connection is to allow any ESD  
picked up by the antenna to bypass the module’s internal ground path.  
Note!  
Note!  
It is recommended that you use a cable with a maximum resistance of  
5mfor the ground connection.  
AGND and DGND are connected at a star point inside the module. They  
must not be joined together in your application.  
Audio  
Use a coupling capacitor in ATMS line if the application does not use  
the module’s bias voltage. See also “Figure 2.3 Microphone  
Software Upgrade  
To upgrade the software, the system connector must be accessible in  
your application. The pins SERVICE, TD, RD and the power signals  
are used for this purpose. Please contact customer support for more  
details.  
4.3 Antenna  
4.3.1 General  
The antenna is the component in your system that maintains the radio  
link between the network and the module. Since the antenna transmits  
and receives electromagnetic energy, its efficient function will depend  
on:  
• the type of antenna (for example, circular or directional);  
• the placement of the antenna;  
• communication disturbances in the vicinity in which the antenna  
operates.  
In the sections below, issues concerning antenna type, antenna  
placement, antenna cable, and possible communication disturbances are  
addressed.  
In any event, you should contact your local antenna manufacturer for  
additional information concerning antenna type, cables, connectors,  
antenna placement, and the surrounding area. You should also  
72  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODULE  
determine whether the antenna needs to be grounded or not. Your local  
antenna manufacturer might be able to design a special antenna suitable  
for your the application.  
4.3.2 Antenna Type  
Make sure that you choose the right type of antenna for the module.  
Consider the following requirements:  
• the antenna must be designed for the dual frequency bands in use:  
EGSM/GSM900/1800 for the GM47 and  
GSM850/1900 for the GM48;  
• the impedance of the antenna and antenna cable must be 50;  
• the antenna output-power handling must be a minimum of 2W;  
• the VSWR value should be less than 3:1 to avoid damage to the  
module.  
4.3.3 Antenna Placement  
The antenna should be placed away from electronic devices or other  
antennas. The recommended minimum distance between adjacent  
antennas, operating in a similar radio frequency band, is at least 50cm.  
If signal strength is weak, it is useful to face a directional antenna at the  
closest radio base station. This can increase the strength of the signal  
received by the module.  
The module’s peak output power can reach 2W. RF field strength varies  
with antenna type and distance. At 10cm from the antenna the field  
strength may be up to 70V/m and at 1m it will have reduced to 7V/m.  
In general, CE-marked products for residential and commercial areas,  
and light industry can withstand a minimum of 3V/m.  
4.3.4 The Antenna Cable  
Use 50impedance low-loss cable and high-quality 50impedance  
connectors (frequency range up to 2GHz) to avoid RF losses. Ensure  
that the antenna cable is as short as possible.  
The Voltage Standing-Wave Ratio (VSWR) may depend on the  
effectiveness of the antenna, cable and connectors. In addition, if you  
use an adapter between the antenna cable and the antenna connector, it  
is crucial that the antenna cable is a high-quality, low-loss cable.  
Minimize the use of extension cables, connectors and adapters. Each  
additional cable, connector or adapter causes a loss of signal power.  
73  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
4.3.5 Possible Communication Disturbances  
Possible communication disturbances include the following:  
Noise can be caused by electronic devices and radio transmitters.  
Path-loss occurs as the strength of the received signal steadily  
decreases in proportion to the distance from the transmitter.  
Shadowing is a form of environmental attenuation of radio signals  
caused by hills, buildings, trees or even vehicles. This can be a  
particular problem inside buildings, especially if the walls are thick  
and reinforced.  
Multi-path fading is a sudden decrease or increase in the signal  
strength. This is the result of interference caused when direct and  
reflected signals reach the antenna simultaneously. Surfaces such as  
buildings, streets, vehicles, etc., can reflect signals.  
Hand-over occurs as you move from one cell to another in the GSM  
network. Your mobile application call is transferred from one cell to  
the next. Hand-over can briefly interfere with communication and  
may cause a delay, or at worst, a disruption.  
74  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
5. TECHNICAL DATA  
5. Technical Data  
Mechanical Specifications  
Maximum length  
Maximum width  
Maximum thickness  
50mm  
33mm  
7.15mm  
(excluding connector pins and  
top of antenna connector)  
Weight  
18.5g  
Power supply voltage, normal operation  
Voltage  
Ripple  
3.6V nominal (3.4V - 4.0V)  
<100mV @ 200kHz; <20mV @ >200kHz  
Voltage must always stay within a normal operating range, ripple included  
Voice/CSD: <250mA (<2A peak)  
Data (GPRS 4+1); <350mA (<2A peak)  
Power consumption  
Idle mode: <5mA  
Switched off: <100µA  
Radio specifications  
Frequency range  
GM47: EGSM 900MHz and 1800MHz (dual band)  
GM48: GSM 850MHz and 1900MHz (dual band)  
GM47: 900MHz, Class 4, 2W; 1800MHz Class 1, 1W  
GM48: 850MHz, Class 5, 0.8W; 1900MHz Class 1, 1W  
Maximum RF output  
power  
Antenna impedance 50Ω  
SIM card  
3 V or 5 V  
Support of external SIM card  
75  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Environmental specifications  
Operating temperature  
range (full specification)  
-25°C to +55°C  
-30°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
95% at +40°C  
Operating temperature  
range (working)  
Storage temperature  
range  
Maximum relative  
humidity  
Stationary vibration,  
sinusoidal  
Displacement: 7.5mm  
Acceleration amplitude: 20m/s² and 40m/s²  
Frequency range: 2-8Hz, 8-200Hz, 200-500Hz  
Stationary vibration,  
random  
Acceleration spectral density (m²/s²):  
0.96, 2.88, 0.96  
Frequency range:  
5-10Hz, 10-200Hz, 200-500Hz, 60min/axis  
Non-stationary vibration,  
including shock  
Shock response spectrum I, peak acceleration:  
3 shocks in each axis and direction;  
300m/s², 11ms  
Shock response spectrum II, peak acceleration:  
3 shocks in each axis and direction;  
1000m/s², 6ms  
Bump  
Acceleration: 250m/s²  
1.2m  
Free fall transportation  
Rolling pitching  
transportation  
Angle: ±35degrees; period: 8s  
Static load  
10kPa  
Low air pressure/high air  
pressure  
70kPa/106kPa  
Data Storage  
SMS storage capacity  
40 in ME  
In addition, the unit can handle as many  
SMS as the SIM can store  
Phone book capacity  
100  
76  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
6. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
6. Declaration of Conformity  
77  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
7. FCC Certificate  
78  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
Part 4: Using AT Commands  
Product Photo/Illustration  
   
1. Introduction to AT Commands  
1.1 Overview  
AT commands, issued from a computer in your application are used to  
control and implement the functions of the module.  
Using AT commands, the following actions are possible:  
• Control of DCE  
• GPRS  
• Call control  
• Supplementary Service  
• SIM application tool kit  
The GM47 contains a large number of Ericsson-specific commands in  
addition to those implemented in accordance with the GSM and ITU-T  
recommendations. These commands are provided to enhance the  
functions of the module. The Ericsson-specific commands are identified  
by the asterisk that precedes the command (see the syntax description  
provided below).  
Note!  
Only commands that are listed in the Integrator’s Manual are supported  
unless otherwise stated. Other commands may be listed by the module  
but these are only included for historical or legacy reasons.  
1.2 Syntax Description  
This section provides a brief description of the syntax used for the  
GM47, AT command set. See the ITU-T recommendation V.25ter for  
additional information.  
1.2.1 Conventions  
In this manual, the following conventions are used to explain the AT  
commands.  
<command>  
<parameter>  
The name of the command that is to be entered.  
The parameter values that are defined for a certain  
command.  
<CR>  
<LF>  
The command line is terminated by the Carriage  
Return (or Enter key) or ATS3 command.  
Line feed character or ATS4 command.  
81  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
< >  
[ ]  
The term enclosed in angle brackets is a syntactical  
element. The brackets do not appear in the command  
line.  
Square brackets are used to indicate that a certain item  
is optional. For example, sub-parameters of a  
command or an optional part of a response. The  
brackets do not appear in the command line.  
Value  
The default values of the supported parameters are  
indicated by using bold text when presenting the  
value.  
• Other characters, including ‘?’, ‘=’, parenthesis, etc., appear in  
commands and responses as written.  
• The final result codes OK, ERROR, +CME ERROR: <err> and  
CMS ERROR:<err> (see sections 1.2.3, AT Response Syntax and  
1.3, Error Codes) are not listed under “Possible Responses” for each  
AT command.  
• OK and ERROR are listed if these are the only possible responses.  
1.2.2 AT Command Syntax  
The AT standard is a line-oriented command language. Each command  
is made up of the following three elements:  
• the prefix;  
• the body;  
• the termination character.  
The prefix consists of the letters “AT”, which are derived from the first  
two letters of the word attention. The body is made up of the command,  
the parameter, and if applicable the associated values.  
Commands may be combined in the same command line. Spaces  
between the individual bodies are ignored.  
Basic Syntax Command  
The format of basic syntax commands is as follows:  
AT<command>[=][<parameter>]<CR>  
Example! ATL=0<CR> (sets the volume of the speaker)  
Additional commands may follow a command on the same command  
line without any character being required for separation. For the  
command D parameters, see the description for the command in  
question.  
A version of the basic syntax is:  
AT<command><parameter>  
82  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS  
Extended Syntax Command  
• AT+<command>= [<parameter>]  
• AT*<command>=[<parameter>]  
Example! AT+CFUN=0<CR> (powers down the module)  
If several values are included in the command, they are separated by  
commas. It is also possible to enter commands with no values.  
Additional commands may follow an extended syntax command on the  
same command line if a semicolon (; IRA 3B) is inserted after the  
preceeding extended command as a separator.  
Read Command Syntax  
The read command is used to check the current values of  
parameters. Type ‘?’, after the command line:  
• AT+<command>?  
• AT*<command>?  
• AT<command>?  
Example! AT+CSCS?<CR> (show current character set)  
<CR>“IRA”<CR>(information text response)  
<CR>OK<CR>(final result code response)  
Test Command Syntax  
The test command is used to test whether the command has been  
implemented or to give information about the type of subparameters it  
contains. Type ‘?’, after the command line:  
• AT+<command>=?  
• AT*<command>=?  
Example! AT+CPAS=?<CR> (shows supported values for the response  
parameters)  
<CR>CPAS: (0, 3, 4, 129, 130, 131)<CR> (supported values)  
<CR>OK<CR> (final result code)  
If the indicated <parameter> is not recognized, the result code ERROR  
is issued.  
Note!  
Possible responses are indicated both as <command>:(list of  
supported<parameter>) and (in most cases) the actual range of the  
parameter values.  
83  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
1.2.3 AT Response Syntax  
The default mode response shown below, is in text mode. See the  
command V for further details.  
Possible formats for the result codes are:  
• Basic format result code, such as OK. The Basic result code also has  
a numerical equivalent.  
• Extended format result code, prefixed with a plus sign (+) or an  
asterisk (*):  
– AT+<command>: <parameter >  
– AT*<command>: <parameter>  
where the <parameter> is the result code value, note that a single  
space character separates the colon character from the <parameter>.  
If several values are included in the result code, they are separated by  
commas. It is also possible that a result code has no value. The  
extended syntax result codes have no numerical equivalent. They are  
always issued in alphabetical form.  
• Information text response may contain multiple lines separated by  
<CR>. The TE detects the end of informational text responses by  
looking for a final result code response, such as OK.  
There are two types of result code responses as outlined below:  
Final Result Code  
A final result code indicates to the TE that execution of the command  
is completed and another command may be issued.  
• If you type an implemented AT command, you should get the result  
code OK.  
• If you type an AT command that is not implemented, or which had  
the wrong parameter or syntax, you will get an error result code. It is  
ERROR or, for example, +<command> ERROR followed by an  
error code.  
Final result codes are:  
Value  
General meaning  
OK  
Command executed, no errors  
Invalid command or command line too long  
No dialling possible, wrong mode  
Remote station busy  
ERROR  
NO DIALTONE  
BUSY  
NO ANSWER  
NO CARRIER  
Connection completion time-out  
Link not established or disconnected  
84  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS  
Unsolicited Result Code  
Unsolicited result codes indicate the occurrence of an event not directly  
associated with a command being issued from the TE.  
1.3 Error Codes  
1.3.1 +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)  
This final result code is similar to the regular ERROR result code. If  
+CME ERROR: <err> is the result code for any of the commands in a  
command line, none of the commands in the same command line will  
be executed (neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned as a  
result of a completed command line execution). The format of <err> can  
be either numerical or alphabetical, and is set with the +CMEE  
command.  
The table below provides the numerical values for the parameter <err>.  
<err>  
Description Syntax  
0
Phone failure  
1
No connection to phone  
Phone -adaptor link reserved  
Operation not allowed  
Operation not supported  
PH-SIM PIN required  
SIM not inserted  
2
3
4
5
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
SIM PIN required  
SIM PUK required  
SIM failure  
SIM busy  
SIM wrong  
Incorrect password  
SIM PIN2 required  
SIM PUK2 required  
Memory full  
Invalid index  
Not found  
Memory failure  
Text string too long  
Invalid characters in text string  
85  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<err>  
Description Syntax  
26  
Dial string too long  
27  
Invalid characters in dial string  
No network service  
30  
31  
Network time-out  
32  
Network not allowed - emergency calls only  
100  
101- 255  
Unknown  
Reserved by ETS  
1.3.2 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code)  
This final result code indicates an error related to mobile equipment or  
to the network. The operation is similar to the ERROR result code.  
None of the following commands in the same command line will be  
executed. Neither ERROR nor OK result code will be returned. ERROR  
is returned normally when an error is related to syntax or invalid  
parameters. Nevertheless, it always appears when a command fails.  
The syntax is as follows:  
+CMS ERROR: <err>  
Values for the <err> parameter are described in the following table.  
<err>  
Description  
0 - 127  
128 - 255  
300  
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values  
GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values  
ME failure  
301  
SMS service of ME reserved  
Operation not allowed  
Operation not supported  
Invalid PDU mode parameter  
Invalid text mode parameter  
SIM not inserted  
302  
303  
304  
305  
310  
311  
SIM PIN required  
312  
PH-SIM PIN required  
SIM failure  
313  
314  
SIM busy  
315  
SIM wrong  
316  
SIM PUK required  
86  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS  
<err>  
Description  
317  
318  
320  
321  
322  
330  
331  
332  
340  
500  
- 511  
512-  
SIM PIN2 required  
SIM PUK2 required  
Memory failure  
Invalid memory index  
Memory full  
SMSC address unknown  
No network service  
Network time-out  
No +CNMA acknowledgment expected  
Unknown error  
Other values in range 256 - 511 are reserved  
Manufacturer specific  
1.4 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands  
For many of the more complicated commands, examples are provided  
after the command’s description. Always refer to the detailed  
description of the command in question to check valid parameter  
values, AT command syntax and Response syntax.  
1.5 SMS Text Mode  
SMS text mode allows users to send SMSs without having to  
understand how PDUs are constructed. This section describes how to  
carry out basic operations in text mode and explains the steps that need  
to be taken.  
Basic transmission of SMS  
A script which sets the module up is shown below:  
AT+CSDH=1  
Enable the use of text mode parameters  
OK  
AT+CSMP=17,167  
Set text mode parameter  
OK  
AT+CMGF=1  
OK  
Switch the module to text mode  
AT+CMGS=“07787154042”  
Sending an SMS  
> Test SMSÎ  
h
The text must be ended, as in PDU mode, with  
a control-Z character  
87  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
+CMGS: 204  
sdfjldjfl  
OK  
Confirmation that the SMS has been sent  
successfully  
Note the following points:  
1. Once the CSDH, CSMP and CMGF commands have been carried  
out they will not need to be initialized for this session.  
2. These parameters are saved in NVRAM using the &W command.  
Notification of SMS  
New message indications are similar to the PDU mode as shown below:  
AT+CNMI=3,1  
OK  
+CMTI: “SM”,2  
AT+CNMI=3,2  
OK  
+CMT: “+447747008670”,“Matt  
L”,“02/11/19,09:58:42+00”,145,36,0,0,“+447785016005”  
,145,8  
Test sms  
Please note that currently the CMT indication does not have a CR/LF  
appended to the end of the SMS data. If the SMS contains one it will be  
displayed. Otherwise the application will need to recognize the CMT  
line and the length character, in this case 8 and count the characters into  
its input buffer.  
Reading messages  
Reading messages is performed as in PDU mode.  
AT+CMGR=2  
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,“+447747008670”,“Matt L”,“02/11/  
19,09:57:28+00”,145,36,0,0,“  
+447785016005”,145,8  
Test sms  
OK  
Listing messages  
In PDU mode numbers are used as parameters. In text mode letters are  
used instead and these must be upper case as the module does not accept  
lower case commands. See the example below:  
88  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS  
AT+CMGL=“ALL”  
+CMGL: 1,“REC READ”,“+447747008670”,“Matt L”,“02/10/  
21,10:07:23+04”,145,4  
Test  
+CMGL: 2,“REC READ”,“+447747008670”,“Matt L”,“02/11/  
19,09:57:28+00”,145,8  
Test sms  
+CMGL: 3,“REC UNREAD”,“+447747008670”,“Matt L”,“02/11/  
19,09:58:06+00”,145,8  
Test sms  
OK  
1.6 GPRS Communication  
To initiate a session with the network you need to setup a ‘data account’  
on the module, using the AT+CGDCONT command. You need to  
specify the correct Access Point Name (APN), which you get from your  
service provider. The command below sets up the data account to access  
Vodafone’s internet server.  
AT+CGDCONT=1,“IP”,“internet”  
After this you need to use the ATD command to make a GPRS call. The  
example below dials into the network using account number 1 (the  
GM47 supports up to 10):  
ATD*99***1#  
If the module is able to connect to the APN it will return a CONNECT.  
At this point PPP/IP packets should be sent by the application, to  
negotiate an IP address. The easiest way of doing this whole thing is to  
create a windows dial up networking session with the dial string  
*99***1# after creating the data account on the module.  
It is not possible to call a mobile station using GPRS at present. The  
reason for this is that unless a PDP context has been setup it has not been  
assigned an IP address by the GGSN/DHCP server and as a result it  
cannot be addressed other than through its phone number (defeating the  
object of using IP). This is specified in GSM 7.60 or 3GPP 27.060.  
89  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
90  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
2. Call Control  
2.1 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control  
2.2 ATA  
Answer Incoming Call  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Answer an incoming  
call  
ATA  
• CONNECT  
• CONNECT <text>  
• NO CARRIER  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Answer and initiate connection to an incoming call.  
<text>  
Description  
19200  
9600  
4800  
2400  
Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD)  
Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s  
Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s  
Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits/s  
91  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.3 ATD  
Dial  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
• Originate a call and  
dial the phone  
number specified in  
the command as  
<dial_string>  
ATD<dial_string>[;]  
• CONNECT  
• CONNECT <text>  
• NO CARRIER  
• ERROR  
• NO DIAL TONE  
• BUSY  
or  
• Do a network  
detect  
• OK  
Dial the phone number  
stored in the mobile  
phone which is  
located by the index  
<I>  
ATD>ME<I>[;]  
ATD>SM<I>[;]  
ATD>LD<I>[;]  
• CONNECT  
• CONNECT <text>  
• NO CARRIER  
• ERROR  
• NO DIAL TONE  
• BUSY  
• OK  
Dial the phone number  
stored in the SIM card  
which is located by the  
index <I>  
• CONNECT  
• CONNECT <text>  
• NO CARRIER  
• ERROR  
• NO DIAL TONE  
• BUSY  
• OK  
Dial the phone number  
stored in the Last  
dialled number list on  
the SIM card, which is  
located by the index  
<I>  
The most recently  
dialled number is  
assumed to have  
<I>="1"  
• CONNECT  
• CONNECT <text>  
• NO CARRIER  
• ERROR  
• NO DIAL TONE  
• BUSY  
• OK  
Redial the last phone  
number dialled.  
Ericsson specific  
ATDL[;]  
...  
Used to initiate a phone connection, which may be data or voice (phone  
number terminated by semicolon). The phone number used to establish  
the connection will consist of digits and modifiers, or a stored number  
specification.  
If the dial string is followed by a semicolon this informs the phone that  
the number is a voice rather than a data number.  
If the dial string is omitted, and the semicolon included, the command  
instructs the ME to do a network detect. If the network is available OK  
is returned.  
Abortability:  
Aborting an ATD command is accomplished by the transmission from  
the DTE to the DCE of any character. A single character shall be  
sufficient to abort the command in progress; however, characters  
92  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
2. CALL CONTROL  
transmitted during the first 125 milliseconds after transmission of the  
termination character are ignored. This is to allow the DTE to append  
additional control characters such as line feed after the command line  
termination character.  
<dial_string>  
Description  
“0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
8 9 * # +”  
Valid characters for origination  
W
The W modifier is ignored but is included only for  
compatibility purposes  
,
The comma modifier is ignored but is included only for  
compatibility purposes  
T
The T modifier is ignored but is included only for  
compatibility purposes  
P
The P modifier is ignored but is included only for  
compatibility purposes  
<Final Result  
Code>  
Description  
CONNECT  
If connection is successfully established, only valid for data  
connections  
CONNECT  
<text>  
If connection is successfully established, only valid for data  
connections  
NO CARRIER  
Unable to establish a connection or the connection  
attempt was aborted by the user  
ERROR  
An unexpected error occurred while trying to establish the  
connection  
NO DIALTONE  
BUSY  
The mobile phone is being used for a voice call or is not  
within coverage of the network  
The phone number called is engaged, valid for data and  
voice connections  
OK  
Only valid for voice connections  
<text>  
Description  
19200  
9600  
4800  
2400  
Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD)  
Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s  
Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s  
Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits/s  
Example  
ATD07747008670;  
OK  
AT+VTS=“4”  
OK  
93  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.4 ATH  
2.5 ATL  
Hang up  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Terminate the call  
ATH  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Signals the MS to terminate an active call.  
Monitor Speaker Loudness  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request monitor  
speaker loudness  
ATL[<value>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATL?  
L: <value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATL=?  
L: (list of supported  
<values>s)  
Included for compatibity. No functionality  
<value>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-14dB (minimum speaker volume)  
-10.5dB  
-7dB  
-3.5dB  
0dB (nominal speaker volume)  
3.5dB  
7dB  
10.5dB  
14dB (maximum speaker volume)  
94  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
2. CALL CONTROL  
2.6 ATO  
Return to Online Data Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Return to on-line data  
mode  
ATO[<value>]  
• CONNECT  
• CONNECT <text>  
• NO CARRIER  
• ERROR  
Switch to the on-line data mode from the on-line command mode during  
an active call. Returns ERROR when not in on-line command mode.  
<value>  
Description  
0
Return to on-line data state from on-line command  
2.7 ATP  
Select Pulse Dialling  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Select pulse dialling  
ATP  
OK  
OK  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATP=?  
Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It  
would normally cause the next D command to use pulses when dialling  
the number.  
2.8 ATT  
Select Tone Dialling  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Select tone dialling  
ATT  
OK  
OK  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATT=?  
Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It  
would normally cause the next D command to use tones when dialling  
the number.  
95  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
           
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.9 ATX  
Call Progress Monitoring Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set call progress  
monitoring control  
ATX=[<n>] or ATX[<n>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATX?  
X: <n>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATX=?  
X: (list of supported  
<n>s)  
Defines if the dial-tone detection and busy-tone detection are to be used  
during a call set-up.  
<n>  
Description  
0
Body and dial tone detection off. No line speed reported  
on connection  
1
2
3
4
Body and dial tone detection off. Report line speed on  
connection  
Busy detection on and dial tone detection off. Report line  
speed on connection  
Busy detect off and dial tone on. Report line speed on  
connection  
Busy detect and dial tone detection on. Report line  
speed on connection. Default value  
Note!  
If there is no network available the <n> parameter will decide if “NO  
DIALTONE” or “NO CARRIER” will be returned. If the call recipient  
is busy, the <n> parameter will decide if “BUSY” or “NO CARRIER”  
will be returned.  
2.10 AT+CHUP Hang up Call  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request hang-up  
AT+CHUP  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the commands  
is supported  
AT+CHUP=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the TA to hang-up the current call of the ME.  
If no call is present, but an incoming call is notified, then the incoming  
call shall be rejected.  
96  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
2. CALL CONTROL  
2.11 AT+CMOD Call Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request Call Mode  
AT+CMOD=[<mode>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CMOD?  
• +CMOD: <mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMOD=?  
• +CMOD: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects the call mode of further dialing commands (D) or for next  
answering command (A). Mode can be either single or alternating. In  
this ETS, terms “alternating mode” and “alternating call” refer to all  
GSM bearer and teleservices that incorporate more than one basic  
service (voice, data, fax) within one call.  
When single mode is selected the call originating and hang-up  
procedures are similar to procedures specified in ITU-T  
Recommendations V.25ter, T.31 and T.32. In GSM there can be voice  
followed by data (refer to GSM 02.02), alternating voice/data (refer to  
GSM 02.02) and alternating voice/fax calls (refer to GSM 02.03).  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
Note!  
+CMOD is set to zero after a successfully completed alternating mode  
call. It is set to zero also after a failed answering. The power-up, factory  
(&F) and user resets (Z), also set the value to zero. This reduces the  
possibility that alternating mode calls are originated or answered  
accidentally.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Single mode. Default value.  
In order to avoid accidental originating or answering of  
alternating calls is <mode> set to single mode in following  
cases:  
- after a successfully completed alternating mode call;  
- after a unsuccessful answering;  
- after successfully execution of the commands &F and Z  
97  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
2.12 AT+CVHU Voice Hang-Up  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Command  
+CVHU=[<mode>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
Show the current  
setting  
+CVHU?  
• +CVHU: <mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
+CVHU=?  
+CVHU: (list of  
supported <mode>s)  
Selects whether ATH or “drop DTR” causes a voice connection to be  
disconnected or not. Voice connection also includes alternating mode  
calls that are currently in voice mode.  
Note!  
When <mode>=2, this command must be viewed in conjunction with  
the V.25ter command &D, or &D will be ignored.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
“Drop DTR” ignored but OK response given. ATH  
disconnects  
1
2
“Drop DTR” and ATH ignored but OK response given  
“Drop DTR” behavior according to &D setting. ATH  
disconnects. Default value  
2.13 AT+VTS  
DTMF and Tone Generation  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request transmission of  
DTMF tone(s)  
AT+VTS=<DTMF>  
OK  
ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+VTS=?  
OK  
ERROR  
This command allows the transmission of DTMF tones. These tones  
may be used, for example, when announcing the start of a recording  
period. The command is write only. In this profile of commands, the  
command does not operate in data or fax modes of operation  
(+FCLASS=0,1,2-7).  
Note!  
The ATD-command is used only for dialing. It is not possible to  
generate arbitrary DTMF tones using the ATD command.  
98  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
2. CALL CONTROL  
Note!  
The AT+VTS command is used only during a voice call.  
<DTMF>  
Description  
ASCII  
character  
string  
An ASCII character string with entries in the set 0-9, #, *, A-  
D separated by commas. Each entry is interpreted as a  
single ASCII character.  
Example: The string “8,9” sends two DTMF tones, “8”  
followed by “9”  
99  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
100  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
3. Control and Status  
3.1 ATQ  
Result Code Suppression  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Result Code  
Suppression  
ATQ[=]<value>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATQ?  
Q: <value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATQ=?  
Q: (list of supported  
<value>s)  
Determines whether or not the DCE transmits result codes to the DTE.  
When result codes are being suppressed, no portion of any intermediate,  
final, or unsolicited result code - header, result text, line terminator, or  
trailer - is transmitted.  
<value>  
Description  
0
1
DCE transmits result codes. Default value  
Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted  
3.2 ATS0  
Automatic Answer Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Automatic answer  
control  
ATS0=[<rcnt>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATS0?  
<rcnt>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS0=?  
S0: (list of supported  
<rcnt>s)  
Defines the automatic answering feature of the modem. A non-zero  
value specifies the number of rings before the call is answered.  
Note!  
Call is always answered in the current fax class, regardless of whether  
the incoming call is voice, data, or fax.  
<rcnt>  
Description  
0
Disable automatic answer. Default value  
1-7  
Answer after the specified number of rings  
101  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
         
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.3 ATS2  
Escape Sequence Character  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set escape sequence  
character  
ATS2=[<esc>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATS2?  
<esc>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS2=?  
S2: (list of supported  
<esc>s)  
Defines the character to be used as the escape sequence character when  
switching from on-line data mode to on-line command mode. The  
response to the command is modified to reflect the change.  
<esc>  
Description  
43  
Escape sequence character. Default value  
0 to 255  
Escape sequence character  
Note!  
If the <esc> parameter is set to a value in the range of 128-255, the  
escape sequence detection is disabled.  
3.4 ATS3  
Command Line Termination Character  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Command Line  
Termination Character  
ATS3=<value>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATS3?  
<value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS3=?  
S3: (list of supported  
<value>s)  
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character  
recognised by the DCE from the DTE to terminate an incoming  
command line. It is also generated by the DCE as part of the header,  
trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with  
the S4 parameter.  
The previous value of S3 is used to determine the command line  
termination character for entry of the command line containing the S3  
setting command. However, the result code issued uses the value of S3  
as set during the processing of the command line. For example, if S3  
was previously set to 13 and the command line “ATS3=30” is issued,  
102  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
the command line is terminated with a <CR> character (IA5 0/13), but  
the result code issued uses the character with the ordinal value 30 (IA5  
2/14) in place of the <CR>.  
<value>  
Description  
13  
Command line termination character, Default value  
0 to 127  
Command line termination character  
3.5 ATS4  
Response Formatting Character  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Response  
Formatting Character  
ATS4=<value>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATS4?  
<value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS4=?  
S4: (list of supported  
<value>s)  
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character  
generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for  
result codes and information text, along with the S3 parameter (see the  
description of the V parameter for usage).  
If the value of S4 is changed in a command line, the result code issued  
in response to that command line will use the new value of S4.  
<value>  
Description  
10  
Formatting character. Default value  
Note: ASCII character 10 is equivalent to <LF>  
0 to 127  
Formatting character  
103  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.6 ATS5  
Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request Command  
Line Editing Character  
ATS5=<value>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATS5?  
<value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS5=?  
S5: (list of supported  
<value>s)  
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character  
recognised by the DCE as a request to delete from the command line the  
immediately preceding character.  
<value>  
Description  
8
Line editing character. Default value  
0 to 127  
Line editing character  
3.7 ATS6  
Blind Dial Delay Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Blind dial delay control  
ATS6=[<dly>]  
ATS6?  
OK  
Show the current  
setting  
<dly>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS6=?  
S6: (list of supported  
<dly>s)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality  
<dly>  
Description  
2
Wait two seconds before blind dialling. Default value  
2-255  
Number of seconds to wait before blind dialling  
104  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.8 ATS7  
Connection Completion Timeout  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set connection  
completion timeout  
ATS7=[<tmo>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATS7?  
<tmo>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS7=?  
S7: (list of supported  
<tmo>s)  
Defines the maximum time allowed between completion of dialling and  
the connection being established. If this time is exceeded then the  
connection is aborted.  
<tmo>  
Description  
50  
Timeout value in seconds. Default value  
1-255  
Timeout value in seconds  
3.9 ATS8  
Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Comma Dial  
Modifier Delay Control  
ATS8=[<dly>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATS8?  
<dly>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS8=?  
S8: (list of supported  
<dly>s)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality  
<dly>  
Description  
2
The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds. Default value  
1-255  
The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds  
105  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.10 ATS10  
Automatic Disconnect Delay Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Automatic  
Disconnect Delay  
Control  
ATS10=[<val>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATS10?  
<val>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATS10=?  
S10: (list of supported  
<val>s)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality  
<val>  
Description  
2
Remains connected for two tenths of a second. Default value  
1-254  
Number of tenths of a second of delay  
3.11 AT*ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Call Monitoring on  
or off  
AT*ECAM=<onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*ECAM?  
• *ECAM: <onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ECAM=?  
• *ECAM: list of  
supported <onoff>s  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command activates or deactivates the call monitoring function in  
the ME. When this log function is activated in the ME, the ME informs  
about call events, such as incoming call, connected, hang up etc.  
It is preferable that the current status shall always be sent with result  
code *ECAV when activating the log function. The purpose of this is  
two fold:  
• to gather relevant information for the call log in a TE;  
106  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
• to make it possible for the TE to display call state information for an  
ongoing call.  
<onoff>  
Description  
0
1
The call log function is disabled (off). Default value  
The call log function is enabled (on)  
Unsolicited result codes:  
*ECAV: <ccid>,<ccstatus>,<calltype>,[<processid>],[<exitcause>],  
[<number>,<type>]  
<ccid>  
Description  
1 to 7  
Integer type. A number which uniquely defines a call in  
the phone (= number of call control process). There can  
not be two call id’s with the same number simultaneously.  
The maximum number of call control processes are 7,  
which are 5 multiparty members, one call on hold, and  
one waiting call  
<ccstatus>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Idle  
Calling (MO)  
Connecting (MO)  
Active (connection between A and B)  
Hold  
Waiting (MT)  
Alerting (MT)  
Busy  
<calltype>  
Description  
1
Voice  
Data  
2
128  
Voice2  
<processid>  
Description  
Integer  
Reported when returning to the Idle state (<ccstatus>=0)  
8 = H’08 = CC (Call Control)  
68 = H’44 = MM (Mobile Management)  
69 = H’45 = MS (Mobile Station)  
122 = H’7A = RR (Radio Resources)  
107  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<exitcause>  
Description  
Integer  
Exit cause according to GSM 04.08 reported when  
returning to Idle state (<ccstatus> = 0)  
<number>  
Description  
String  
String type phone number of format specified by <type>.  
Only valid for <ccstatus> = 1 (Calling)  
<type>  
Description  
Type of address octet in integer format (refer to GSM  
04.08, subclause 10.5.4.7)  
129  
145  
ISDN/Telephony numbering plan, national/international  
unknown. Default if no “+” in sca  
ISDN/Telephony numbering plan, international number.  
Default if “+” in sca.  
161  
ISDN/Telephony numbering plan, national number  
128 to 255  
Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7. Only valid  
for <ccstatus> = 1 (Calling)  
Examples  
AT*ECAM?  
*ECAM: 0  
AT*ECAM=1  
OK  
3.12 AT*EDST  
Ericsson Daylight Saving Time  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Daylight Saving  
Time  
AT*EDST=<dst>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*EDST?  
• *EDST: <dst>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EDST=?  
• *EDST: (list of  
supported <dst>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command sets the daylight saving time hours.  
108  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
Note!  
This command affects the MS clock set with the AT+CCLK command.  
To avoid confusion it is recommended the daylight saving time (DST)  
is set with this command before setting the actual local time with  
AT+CCLK.  
<dst>  
Description  
0
1
2
Standard time  
Daylight saving time, +1 hour  
Daylight saving time, +2 hours  
3.13 AT*EMAR  
Ericsson Master Reset  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Perform a master reset  
in the MS  
AT*EMAR=<phone lock  
code>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EMAR=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command requests the MS to reset user data. The user data in the  
MS will be reset to the default values. This command also unlocks the  
MS.  
<phone lock code>  
Description  
String  
Security code (phone lock code) must be verified  
before performing the master reset, see also  
AT+CLCK  
109  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.14 AT*EPEE  
Ericsson Pin Event  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Requests the MS to  
inform when the PIN  
code has been  
inserted  
AT*EPEE=<onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*EPEE?  
• *EPEE: <onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EPEE=?  
• *EPEE: (list of  
supported <onoff>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The command requests the MS to report when the PIN code has been  
inserted and accepted.  
<onoff>  
Description  
0
Request for report on inserted PIN code is not activated  
(off). Default value  
1
Request for report on inserted PIN code is activated (on)  
3.15 AT*ESMM Ericsson Settings Minute Minder  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the Minute Minder  
to on or off  
AT*ESMM=<mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*ESMM?  
• *ESMM: <mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ESMM=?  
• *ESMM: list of  
supported <mode>s  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command sets the minute minder setting to “on” or “off” in the  
MS. Test command returns the <mode> value. When set to “on”, a beep  
is sent to the audio output every minute.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
OFF, minute minder off. Default value  
ON, minute minder on  
110  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.16 AT+CALA Set Alarm  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set an alarm time in  
the ME  
AT+CALA=<time>[,  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
<n>[,<type>[,<text>  
[,<recurr>[,<silent>]]]  
]]  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CALA?  
• +CALA:  
<time1>,<n1>,<type1>,[<t  
ext1>],[<recurr1>],<silent1  
>[<CR><LF>+CALA:  
<time2>,<n2>,<type2>,[<t  
ext2>],[<recurr2>],<silent2  
>[…]]+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CALA=?  
• +CALA: (list of supported  
<n>s),(list of supported  
type>s),<tlength>,<rlengt  
h>,(list of supported  
<silent>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The command sets an alarm time in the ME. An array of different  
alarms can be set and each may be recurrent. If alarm setting fails,  
ERROR: <err> is returned.  
When the alarm is timed out and executed, the unsolicited result code  
+CALV: <n> is always returned, even if the alarm is setup to be silent.  
The alarm time is set in hours and minutes. Date, seconds and time zone  
cannot be set.  
The alarm function uses the ring type defined with the AT*ERIN  
command.  
The read command returns the list of current active alarm settings in the  
ME.  
Show returns the supported array index values, alarm types and  
maximum length of the text strings.  
<time>  
Description  
string type  
value  
Refer to the AT+CCLK command. Note! Only hours and  
minutes are used i.e. date, time zone and seconds are not  
used  
<n>  
Description  
Integer type  
Index identifying an active alarm  
111  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Note!  
Note!  
The number of active alarms is manufacturer and product specific.  
<tlength>  
Description  
Integer type  
Maximum length of <text> parameter  
The maximum length of the <text> parameter is manufacturer and  
product specific.  
<recurr>  
Description  
Format:  
“<1..7>[,<1..7>  
[…]]”  
For setting an alarm for one or more days in the week. The  
digits 1 to 7 correspond to the days in the week, Monday  
(1), …, Sunday (7). Example: The string “1,2,3,4,5” may be  
used for setting an alarm for all weekdays  
Format:“0”  
For setting an alarm for all days in the week  
<rlength>  
Description  
Integer type  
Maximum length of the <recurr> parameter  
Unsolicited result codes:  
+CALV: <n>  
3.17 AT+CALD Alarm Delete  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Delete an alarm  
AT+CALD=<n>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CALD=?  
• +CALD: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command removes an active alarm.  
<n>  
Description  
Integer type  
Index identifying an active alarm  
112  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.18 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set the real time clock  
of the ME  
AT+CCLK=<time>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CCLK?  
• +CCLK: <time>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CCLK=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sets the real time clock of the ME. If setting fails in an ME, error +CME  
ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current setting  
of the clock.  
<time>  
Description  
string type  
value  
Format is “yy/mm/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where characters  
indicate year (two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes,  
seconds and time zone (indicates the difference,  
expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time  
and GMT; range -47...+48), e.g. 6th of May 1994, 22:10:00  
GMT+2 hours reads “94/05/06,22:10:00+08”  
NOTE: If the ME does not support time zone information  
then the three last characters of <time> are not returned  
by +CCLK?  
Example  
AT+CCLK?  
+CCLK: “00/01/01,22:54:48+00”  
OK  
AT+CCLK=“19/11/02,09:30:00+00”  
OK  
113  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.19 AT+CEER  
Extended Error Report  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request an Extended  
Error Report  
AT+CEER  
• +CEER: <report>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CEER=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the TA to return one or more lines of information text <report>.  
Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the failure  
information given by the GSM network in text format.  
<report>  
Description  
characters  
The total number of characters, including line terminators,  
in the information text shall not exceed 2041 characters.  
Text shall not contain the sequence 0<CR> or OK<CR>  
3.20 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set MS functionality  
AT+CFUN=<fun>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CFUN?  
• +CFUN: <fun>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CFUN=?  
• +CFUN: (list of  
supported <fun>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Selects the level of functionality <fun> in the MS. Level “full  
functionality” results in the highest level of power drawn. “Minimum  
functionality” results in the minimum power drawn. Manufacturers may  
also specify levels of functionality between these two end levels.  
Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound.  
“AT+CFUN=” is interpreted as “AT+CFUN=0”.  
Note!  
<fun>  
Description  
0
Minimum functionality. Default value  
Note: The ME is turned off  
1
Full functionality.  
Note: If previously turned off, the phone is turned on  
114  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.21 AT+CIND  
Indicator Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Indicator  
Control  
AT+CIND=[<ind>  
[,<ind>[,…]]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CIND?  
• +CIND: <ind>,<ind>,…  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CIND=?  
• +CIND: (<descr>,(list of  
supported <ind>s)),  
(<descr>,(list of supported  
<ind>s)),…  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to set the values of ME indicators. <ind> value 0 means that the  
indicator is off (or in state which can be identified as “off” state), 1  
means that indicator is on (or in a state which is more substantial than  
“off” state), 2 is more substantial than 1, and so on. If the indicator is a  
simple on/off style element, it has values 0 and 1. The number of  
elements is ME specific. If the ME does not allow setting of indicators  
or it is not currently reachable, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. If a  
certain indicator is not writable, it cannot be set. If the parameter is an  
empty field, the indicator will keep the previous value.  
Test command returns pairs, where string value <descr> is a maximum  
16 character description of the indicator and compound value is the  
allowed values for the indicator. If ME is not currently reachable,  
+CME ERROR: <err> is returned (refer to GSM 07.07).  
<ind>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value shall be in range of corresponding <descr>  
<descr>  
Description  
“signal”  
Signal quality (0-5)  
“service”  
“sounder”  
“message”  
“call”  
Service availability (0-1)  
Sounder activity (0-1)  
Message received (0-1)  
Call in progress (0-1)  
Roaming indicator (0-1)  
“roam”  
“sms full”  
A short message memory storage in the MT has become full  
(1), or memory locations are available (0); i.e. the range is  
(0-1)  
115  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.22 AT+CLAC List all available AT Commands  
Command  
Possible Responses  
+CLAC  
<AT Command1> [<CR> <LF> <AT Command2>[…]]  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
+CLAC=?  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
Causes the ME to return one or more lines of AT commands. This  
command has the same functionality as AT*.  
Note!  
This command only returns the AT commands that are available to the  
user.  
3.23 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request GSM Mobile  
Equipment Error  
Control  
AT+CMEE=[<n>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CMEE?  
• +CMEE: <n>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMEE=?  
• +CMEE: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Disables or enables the use of result code +CME ERROR: <err> as an  
indication of an error relating to the functionality of the ME. When  
enabled, ME related errors cause +CME ERROR: <err> final result  
code instead of the regular ERROR final result code. ERROR is  
returned normally when error is related to syntax, invalid parameters, or  
TA functionality. For more information, refer to “+CME ERROR  
<n>  
Description  
0
Disable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use ERROR  
instead. Default value  
1
2
Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use numeric  
<err> values (see page 85)  
Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use verbose  
<err> values (see page 85)  
116  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.24 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Phone  
Activity Status  
AT+CMER=[<mode> • +CME ERROR: <err>  
[,<keyp>[,<disp>  
[,<ind>[,<bfr>]]]]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CMER?  
• +CMER:  
<mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,  
<ind>,<bfr>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMER=?  
• +CMER: (list of supported s),  
(list of supported  
<keyp>s),(list of supported  
<disp>s),(list of supported  
<ind>s),(list of supported  
<bfr>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The command enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result  
codes from the ME to the TE in the case of key pressings, display  
changes, and indicator state changes. <mode> controls the processing  
of unsolicited result codes specified within this command. <bfr>  
controls the effect on buffered codes when <mode> 1, 2 or 3 is entered.  
If the ME does not support setting, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.  
Test command returns the modes supported by the TA as compound  
values.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA; if TA result code  
buffer is full, codes can be buffered in some other place  
or the oldest ones can be discarded  
3
Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE; TA-TE  
link specific inband technique used to embed result  
codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode  
<keyp>  
Description  
0
2
No keypad event reporting  
Keypad event reporting using result code +CKEV:  
<key>,<press>. Enables keypad event reporting of all key  
pressings  
Note: When this mode is enabled, corresponding result  
codes of all keys currently pressed will be flushed to the TA  
regardless of <bfr> setting  
<disp>  
Description  
0
No display event reporting  
117  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<ind>  
Description  
0
1
No indicator event reporting  
Indicator event reporting using result code +CIEV:  
<ind>,<value>. <ind> indicates the indicator order number  
(as specified for +CIND) and <value> is the new value of  
indicator. Only those indicator events, which are not  
caused by +CIND shall be indicated by the TA to the TE  
<bfr>  
Description  
0
TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this  
command is cleared when <mode> 1...3 is entered  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
+CKEV: <key>,<press>  
+CIEV: <ind>,<value>  
3.25 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Execute Phone Activity  
Status  
AT+CPAS[=<mode>]  
• +CPAS: <pas>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CPAS=?  
• +CPAS:  
(list of supported  
<pas>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns the activity status <pas> of the ME. It can be used to interrogate  
the ME before requesting action from the phone.  
When the command is executed without the <mode> argument, the  
command returns <pas> values from 0 to 128 (for supported values see  
table below). When, on the other hand, the command is executed with  
the <mode> argument set to 1, the command may return Ericsson  
specific <pas> values from 129 to 255 (for supported values see the  
table below).  
118  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound  
value: refer to GSM 07.07.  
<pas>  
Description  
0
3
Ready (ME allows commands from TA/TE)  
Ringing (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, but the  
ringer is active)  
4
Call in progress (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, but  
a call is in progress)  
129  
130  
Not in call  
Mobile oriented call in progress. This is a sub-state to ‘call  
in progress’  
131  
Mobile terminated call in progress. This is a sub-state to  
‘call in progress’  
<mode>  
Description  
1
Allows the CPAS to return Ericsson specific <pas> values,  
such as 129, 130 and 131  
Example  
AT+CPAS=?  
+CPAS: (0,3,4,129,130,131)  
OK  
AT+CPAS  
+CPAS: 0  
OK  
119  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.26 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request PIN Control  
AT+CPIN=<pin>[,<new  
pin>]  
• +CME ERROR:  
<err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CPIN?  
• +CPIN: <code>  
• +CME ERROR:  
<err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CPIN=?  
• +CME ERROR:  
<err>  
• +CPIN: (supported  
<code>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends the password to the ME, which is necessary to make the ME  
operational (SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM). If the PIN is to be entered  
twice, the TA autonomously repeats the PIN. If no PIN request is  
pending, no action is taken towards the ME and an error message  
(+CME ERROR <err>) is returned to the TE.  
If the PIN required is PUK, the second pin is required. This second PIN,  
<newpin>, is used to replace the old PIN in the SIM.  
Note!  
Commands which interact with the ME that are accepted when the ME  
has a pending request for SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM are: +CGMI,  
+CGMM, +CGMR, +CGSN, +CFUN, +CMEE +CPIN, L and M.  
<pin>,<newpin>  
Description  
string  
The range for the SIM PIN and the PH- SIM PIN is 4 - 8  
digits. The SIM PUK consists of 8 digits  
<code>  
Description  
READY  
SIM PIN  
SIM PUK  
ME is not pending for any password  
ME is waiting SIM PIN to be given  
ME is waiting SIM PUK to be given  
120  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
<code>  
Description  
PH-SIM PIN  
SIM PIN2  
ME is waiting PHone-to-SIM card password to be given  
ME is waiting SIM PIN2 to be given. This <code> is  
recommended to be returned only when the last  
executed command resulted in PIN2 authentication  
failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 17); if PIN2 is not entered  
correctly after the failure, it is recommended that ME does  
not block its operation  
SIM PUK2  
ME is waiting SIM PUK2 to be given. This <code> is  
recommended to be returned only when the last  
executed command resulted in PUK2 authentication  
failure (i.e. +CME ERROR:18); if PUK2 and new PIN2 are not  
entered correctly after the failure, it is recommended that  
ME does not block its operation.  
BLOCKED  
The SIM cards is blocked for the user  
<err>  
Description  
0
Phone failure  
5
PH-SIM PIN required  
SIM not inserted  
SIM PIN required  
SIM PUK required  
SIM failure  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
24  
25  
100  
SIM busy  
SIM wrong  
Incorrect password  
Text string too long  
Invalid characters in text string  
Unknown  
Example  
AT+CPIN=“0000”  
OK  
121  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.27 AT+CPWD Change Password  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request facility lock  
AT+CPWD=<fac>,  
<oldpwd>,  
<newpwd>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CPWD=?  
• +CPWD:  
(<fac1>,<pwdlength1>),  
(<fac2>,<pwdlength2>),  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sets a new password for the facility lock function defined by command  
Facility Lock +CLCK.  
Test command returns a list of pairs which present the available  
facilities and the maximum length of their password.  
<fac>  
Description  
“PS”  
PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when  
other than current SIM card inserted)  
“SC”  
SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up  
and when this lock command issued)  
“P2”  
“AO”  
“OI”  
SIM PIN2  
BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)  
BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls) (refer GSM 02.88  
clause 1)  
“AI”  
“IR”  
BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)  
BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the  
home country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)  
“OX”  
BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to  
Home Country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)  
“AB”  
“AG”  
“AC”  
All Barring services (refer GSM 02.30)  
All outGoing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)  
All inComing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)  
<oldpwd>  
Description  
string type  
<oldpwd> shall be the same as password specified for the  
facility from the ME user interface or with the change  
password command, +CPWD  
<newpwd>  
Description  
string type  
<newpwd> is the new password, maximum length of  
password can be determined with <pwdlength>  
122  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
<pwdlength>  
Description  
Integer type  
Maximum length of the password for the facility  
<err>  
Description  
0
Phone failure  
3
Operation not allowed  
PH-SIM PIN required  
SIM not inserted  
SIM PIN required  
SIM PUK required  
SIM failure  
5
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
23  
24  
100  
101..255  
SIM busy  
SIM wrong  
Incorrect password  
SIM PIN2 required  
SIM PUK2 required  
Text string too long  
Invalid characters in text string  
Unknown  
Reserved by ETS  
Example  
AT+CPWD=“SC”,“0000”,“0001”  
OK  
123  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.28 AT+CR  
Service Reporting Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Service Reporting  
Control  
AT+CR=<mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CR?  
• +CR: <mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CR=?  
• +CR: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Enables or disables display of intermediate bearer capability reports  
during the handshake phase.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Disable reporting. Default value  
Enable reporting  
Intermediate Result Codes:  
+CR: <serv>  
3.29 AT+CRC  
Cellular Result Code  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Cellular Result  
Code option  
AT+CRC=[<mode>]  
AT+CRC?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
• +CRC: <mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CRC=?  
• +CRC: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Command controls whether or not;  
• the extended format of incoming call indication;  
• or GPRS network request for PDP context activation;  
• or notification for VBS/VGCS calls is used.  
When enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the TE with unsolicited  
result code +CRING: <type> instead of the normal RING.  
124  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Disables extended format  
Enables extended format  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
+CRING: <type>  
3.30 AT+CSAS  
Save Settings  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Save Settings  
AT+CSAS[=<profile>]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CSAS=?  
• +CSAS: (list of supported  
<profile>s)  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Saves active message service settings to a non-volatile memory. A TA  
can contain several settings profiles. Settings specified in commands  
Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP and  
Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB (if implemented) are  
saved. Certain settings may not be supported by the storage (e.g. SIM  
SMS parameters) and therefore can not be saved.  
Test command shall display the supported profile numbers for reading  
and writing of settings.  
<profile>  
Description  
0..255  
Manufacturer specific profile number where settings are  
to be stored. Default value is 0  
125  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
3.31 AT+CSQ  
Signal Strength  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Show the Signal  
Strength  
AT+CSQ  
• +CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CSQ=?  
• +CSQ: (list of  
supported  
<rssi>s),(list of  
supported <ber>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns the received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit  
error rate <ber> from the ME. Test command returns values supported  
by the TA as compound values.  
<rssi>  
Description  
0
–113dBm or less  
1
–111dBm  
2..30  
31  
99  
–109… –53dBm  
–51dBm or greater  
Not known or not detectable  
<ber>  
Description  
0..7  
As RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05.08 subclause  
8.2.4  
99  
Not known or not detectable  
Example  
AT+CSQ  
+CSQ: 13,99  
OK  
126  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
3. CONTROL AND STATUS  
3.32 AT+CTZU  
Automatic Time Zone Update  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Enable and disable  
automatic time zone  
update via NITZ  
AT+CTZU=<onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CTZU?  
• +CTZU: <onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CTZU=?  
• +CTZU: (list of  
supported <onoff>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Enables and disables the automatic time zone update via NITZ. If  
setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR <err> is returned.  
<onoff>  
Description  
0
The automatic time zone update is disabled (off). Default  
value  
1
The automatic time zone update is enabled (on)  
127  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
128  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
4. Audio  
Note!  
*E2EAMS and *E2APR are new commands that replace the  
funtionality offered by the *EALR, *EAMS, *EARS and *ELAM  
commands. Use the new commands in new applications. The old  
commands are included for compatibility.  
4.1 AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request  
operation  
with audio  
profile  
AT*E2EAMS= <op>[,<TxPGA>, • ERROR  
<RxPGA>,<SideToneGain>,  
<AuxInGain>,<MicInGain>,  
<TxAGC>,<Volume>,  
• OK  
<MaxVolume>,<MicPath>,  
<SpkPath>,<TxPCM>,  
<RxPCM>,<HFAlgorithm>,  
<LocalAudio>,<TxGainLow>,  
<MicVolt2V>,<SideTone>,  
<NoiseRed>,<EchoCancel>,  
<AnalogRing>,][,<val>]]  
Show the  
current  
setting  
AT*E2EAMS?  
• *E2EAMS: <TxPGA>,  
<RxPGA>,  
<SideToneGain>,  
<AuxInGain>,  
<MicInGain>,  
<TxAGC>,<Volume>,  
<MaxVolume>,  
<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,  
<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,  
<HFAlgorithm>,  
<LocalAudio>,  
<TxGainLow>,  
<MicVolt2V>,  
<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,  
<EchoCancel>,  
<AnalogRing>  
OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command  
is supported  
AT*E2EAMS=?  
• *E2EAMS:  
(list of supported <op>s)  
• ERROR  
This command allows the modification and configuration of the current  
audio profile. An audio profile is a set of data which uniquely defines  
the way in which the audio paths, gains, DSP algorithms and switch  
setting are configured. There are several audio profiles available in  
non-volatile storage, and the current profile can be modified by use of  
the AT*E2APR command.  
The AT*E2EAMS command allows the user to:  
129  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
• configure the whole profile, specifying each audio parameter in a  
comma separated list;  
• set a single parameter, given by its parameter number;  
• save the current profile to non-volatile memory under the current  
profile number (see AT*E2APR).  
The current audio settings can also be displayed by running the read  
command AT*E2EAMS?  
Default audio settings are given in AT*E2APR.  
Abortability:  
This command may not be aborted.  
Refer to the diagram below to understand which parts of the audio  
circuit are affected by the various parameters.  
CODEC  
DSP  
Speech  
decoder  
F/R  
ATMS  
PCMOUT  
PCMULD  
AuxInGain  
MicInGain  
TxPGA  
TxGainLow  
TxPCM  
MicPath  
switches  
MICP  
MICN  
SideTone  
Gain  
Handsfree  
EchoCancel  
NoiseRed  
SideTone  
switch  
Aux Amp  
Ear Amp  
SpkPath  
switches  
PCMIN  
PCMDLD  
Encoder  
F/R  
RxPGA  
Volume  
RxPCM  
BEARP  
BEARN  
Figure 4.1 Audio diagram of the CODEC  
130  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
4. AUDIO  
<op>  
Description  
0
Configure current profile (<pr1> to <pr21>)  
Set <TxPGA>  
1
2
Set <RxPGA>  
3
Set <SideToneGain>  
Set <AuxInGain>  
Set <MicInGain>  
Set <TxAGC>  
4
5
6
7
Set <Volume>  
8
Set <MaxVolume>  
Set <MicPath>  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
255  
Set <SpkPath>  
Set <TxPCM>  
Set <RxPCM>  
Set <HFAlgorithm>  
Set <LocalAudio>  
Set <TxGainLow>  
Set <MicVolt2V>  
Set <SideTone>  
Set <NoiseRed>  
Set <EchoCancel>  
Set <AnalogRing>  
Save current profile to non-volatile storage at current  
profile number  
<TxPGA>,  
<RxPGA>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
-5dB PGA gain  
-2.5dB PGA gain  
0dB PGA gain  
2.5dB PGA gain  
131  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<TxPGA>,  
Description  
<RxPGA>  
5dB PGA gain  
4
5
6
7
7.5dB PGA gain  
–7.5dB PGA gain  
–10dB PGA gain  
<SideToneGain> Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
10dB  
13dB  
16dB  
19dB  
22dB  
25dB  
<AuxInputGain>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
MUTE  
13dB  
34dB  
46dB  
<MicInputGain>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
MUTE  
13dB  
25dB  
34dB  
46dB  
<TxAGCGain>  
Description  
0
1
2
0dB  
3dB  
6dB  
132  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
4. AUDIO  
<Volume>,  
Description  
<MaxVolume>  
0
MUTE  
1-9  
Volume levels 1-9  
<MicPath>,  
<SpkPath>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
OFF  
MUTE  
Internal (using microphone/speaker)  
External (using ATMS/AFMS)  
<TxPCM>,  
<RxPCM>  
Description  
0
1
13bit PCM  
16bit PCM  
<HFAlgorithm>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
No handsfree  
Advanced handsfree  
Switching handsfree  
No handsfree handheld  
No handsfree external  
<LocalAudio>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Local audio mode off  
Local audio microphone/no speaker  
Local audio no microphone/speaker  
Local audio microphone/speaker  
<TxGainLow>  
Description  
0
1
Tx gain normal  
Tx gain –7dB  
133  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<MicVolt2V>  
Description  
0
1
Microphone voltage at 2.5V  
Microphone voltage at 2V  
<SideTone>,  
Description  
<NoiseRed>,  
<EchoCancel>,  
<AnalogRing>  
0
1
OFF  
ON  
Examples  
AT*E2EAMS=?  
*E2EAMS=(0-21,255)  
OK  
Current default profile is 0:  
AT*E2EAMS?  
*E2EAMS: 2,2,3,2,3,2,5,9,3,3,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1,1  
OK  
Sets current profile with these settings:  
AT*E2EAMS=0,2,1,2,0,0,2,5,9,2,2,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1  
OK  
Sets TxPGA gain to 0dB:  
AT*E2EAMS=1,2  
OK  
Turns analog ringing off:  
AT*E2EAMS=20,0  
OK  
Save current profile to currently loaded profile in non-volatile memory:  
AT*E2EAMS=255  
OK  
134  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
4. AUDIO  
4.2 AT*E2APR  
M2M Audio Profile Manipulation  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request operation  
with audio profile  
AT*E2APR=  
<op>[,<prnum1>  
[,<prnum2>]]  
• ERROR  
• OK  
• *E2APR: <TxPGA>,<RxPGA>,  
<SideToneGain>,<AuxInGain>,  
<MicInGain>,<TxAGC>,  
<Volume>,<MaxVolume>,  
<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,  
<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,  
<HFAlgorithm>,<LocalAudio>,  
<TxGainLow>,<MicVolt2V>,  
<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,  
<EchoCancel>,<AnalogRing>  
• OK  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*E2APR?  
*E2APR: current <prnum>  
ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2APR=?  
• *E2APR: (list of supported  
<op>s), (list of supported  
<prnum1>s), (list of supported  
<prnum2>s)  
• ERROR  
This command allows the maniuplation and storage of the audio  
“profiles” stored in the MS. The requirement for the 2nd and 3rd  
parameters depend on the operation being carried out.  
Using the command you can:  
• Set one of the three audio profiles 0, 1 or 2 as the current profile.  
This will load the profile's settings from NVM and implement them.  
• Read one of the audio profiles. The current settings for the profile  
number defined will be displayed.  
• Copy all parameters from one profile into another.  
• Reset any of the profiles. This will reinstate the factory defaults for  
the profile:  
- 0 is the handset profile,  
- 1 is the portable handsfree profile,  
- 2 is the car kit profile.  
• Set a profile as the default profile on next power up.  
<op>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
Set profile <prnum1> to set as current  
Copy profile <prnum1> to <prnum2>  
Read profile <prnum1> settings  
Reset profile <prnum1> to factory default  
Set default profile as <prnum1>. Will store this as defautl  
profile in NVM, and use it as default from next power on  
135  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<prnum1>,  
Description  
<prnum2>  
0
1
2
Profile 0 (Factory profile set for handset). Default value  
Profile 1 (Factory profile set for portable handsfree)  
Profile 2 (Factory profile set for car kit)  
Examples  
AT*E2APR=?  
*E2APR= (0-4),(0-2),(0-2)  
OK  
Current default profile is profile 0:  
AT*E2APR?  
*E2APR: 0  
OK  
Set audio profile now used to profile 1:  
AT*E2APR=0,1  
OK  
Audio profile 1 settings:  
AT*E2APR=1,1  
*E2APR: 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0  
OK  
Copy audio profile 1 to audio profile 2:  
AT*E2APR=2,1,2  
OK  
Reset audio profile 1 with factory default - this also resets the current  
audio paths to the new profile as 1 is currently used:  
AT*E2APR=3,1  
OK  
Sets profile number 1 as the default when module is powered on:  
AT*E2APR=4,1  
OK  
136  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
4. AUDIO  
4.3 AT*EALR  
Ericsson Audio Line Request  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request the audio lines  
(ATMS,AFMS)  
AT*EALR=<mode>  
[,<activation>  
[,<aud_status>]]  
• *EALR: <mode>,  
<activation>,<resp>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*EALR?  
*EALR:  
<mode>,<activation>,  
<resp>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EALR=?  
*EALR:(list of supported  
<mode>s,  
<activation>s and  
<aud_status>s  
parameters)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
No request for ATMS or AFMS  
Request ATMS and not AFMS  
Request AFMS and not ATMS  
Request ATMS and AFMS  
<activation>  
Description  
0
Not direct activated audio accessory (e.g. cordless  
portable hands free)  
1
Direct activated audio accessory (e.g. vehicle hands  
free)  
<aud_status>  
Description  
0
1
No change of the audio status  
Audio hand over. Accessory hands over control of both  
the audio lines and the call to the phone  
2
Audio demand. Accessory demands control of both the  
audio lines and the call  
<resp>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Disable ATMS and AFMS  
Enable ATMS and disable AFMS  
Disable ATMS and enable AFMS  
Enable ATMS and AFMS  
137  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
4.4 AT*EAMS  
Ericsson Audio Mode Selection  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the audio  
mode for the  
application  
AT*EAMS=<internal_voice_al  
g>[,<noise_reduction>  
[,<side tone>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
[,<short_echo_canceling>  
[,<ATMS_gain>  
[,<class>  
[,<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation  
_from_class>  
[,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation  
_from_class>]]]]]]]  
Show the  
current  
setting  
AT*EAMS?  
*EAMS:<internal_voice_alg  
>, <noise_reduction>,  
<side_tone>,  
<short_echo_canceling>,  
<AFMS_gain>,<class>,<AT  
MS_sensitivity_deviation_fr  
om_class>,<AFMS_sensitivi  
ty_deviation_from_class>  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*EAMS=?  
*EAMS: (list of supported  
<internal_voice_alg >s,  
<noise_reduction>s,  
<side_tone>s,  
<short_echo_canceling>s,  
<AFMS_gain>s>,  
<class>s,  
<ATMS_sensitivity_deviatio  
n_from_class>s,  
<AFMS_sensitivity_deviatio  
n_from_class>s)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality.  
<internal_voice_alg>  
Description  
0
1
2
None  
Semi Duplex  
Full Duplex  
(Note! the internal hands free algorithm in the  
MS contains echo cancelling)  
<noise_reduction>  
Description  
0
1
Off  
On  
<side_tone>  
Description  
0
1
Off  
On  
138  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
4. AUDIO  
<short_echo_canceling>  
Description  
0
1
Off  
On  
<ATMS_gain>  
Description  
0
Normal (0 dB) (internal voice processing)  
<Class>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
None  
Low end, class reference Hector  
Mid End, class reference Scott  
High End, class reference Hasse  
<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>, Description  
<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>  
0
1
2
3
4
0 dB  
2,5 dB  
–2,5 dB  
5,0 dB  
–5,0 dB  
4.5 AT*EARS  
Ericsson Audio Ring Signal  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request analogue ring  
signal in the loudspeaker  
AT*EARS=<mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current setting  
AT*EARS?  
*EARS: <mode>  
Show if the command is  
supported  
AT*EARS=?  
*EARS: (list of  
supported <mode>s)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Disable analogue ring signal  
Enable analogue ring signal  
139  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
4.6 AT*E2PHFB Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set PHF functionality  
AT*E2PHFB=<op>  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*E2PHFB?  
*E2PHFB: <op>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2PHFB=?  
• *E2PHFB: (list of  
supported <op>s  
• ERROR  
This command allows the user to set the functionality for a PHF  
(portable handsfree) button, as used on simple handsfree equipment.  
When set to ON, the MS will detect the shortcircuit of the ATMS and  
AFMS lines, and interpret this as a PHF button press. This has the effect  
of answering/hanging up a call without recourse to AT commands.  
<op>  
Description  
0
1
Disable PHF button. Default value  
Enable PHF button  
4.7 AT*ELAM  
Ericsson Local Audio Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set local audio mode  
AT*ELAM=<mic>  
[,<loudspeaker>]  
• *ELAM: <mic>,  
<loudspeaker>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*ELAM?  
*ELAM:  
<mic>,<loudspeaker>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ELAM=?  
*ELAM: (list of  
supported <mic>s and  
<loudspeaker>s  
parameters)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality.  
<mic>  
Description  
0
1
Off  
Microphone analogue  
<loudspeaker>  
Description  
0
1
Off  
Loudspeaker analogue  
140  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
4. AUDIO  
4.8 AT*EMIC  
Ericsson Microphone Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Enables/disables the  
phone microphone  
AT*EMIC=<mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*EMIC?  
• *EMIC: <mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EMIC=?  
• *EMIC: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Included for compatibility. No functionality.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Microphone is disabled (off)  
Microphone is enabled (on)  
4.9 AT*EMIR  
Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request for mute  
indications  
AT*EMIR=<mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*EMIR?  
*EMIR: <mode>,<resp>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EMIR=?  
*EMIR: (list of supported  
<mode>s)  
Included for compatibility. No functionality.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Off, music mute indication result codes will not be sent to  
the accessory  
1
On, music mute indication result codes will be sent to the  
accessory  
<resp>  
Description  
0
1
Music mute inactive  
Music mute active  
141  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
4.10 AT*EPRR  
Ericsson Personal Ring Type Read  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read phone number  
and ring type  
AT*EPRR=<indexr>  
• *EPRR:  
<indexr>,<number>,  
<type>,<sound  
type>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EPRR=?  
• *EPRR: (list of  
supported  
<indexr>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns phone number, phone number type and sound type in location  
number <indexr>. If listing fails an error, +CME ERROR: <err>, is  
returned.  
<indexr>  
Description  
1-50  
Value of location number  
<number>  
Description  
string type  
Phone number of format <type>  
<type>  
Description  
integer format  
Type of address octet  
(refer GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7)  
128  
129  
Unknown numbering plan, national / international number  
unknown  
ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international  
unknown  
145  
ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number  
ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values refer GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7  
161  
128 - 255  
<sound type>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
Off. Not supported  
Low ring signal  
Medium ring signal  
High ring signal  
Mixed ring signal  
142  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
4. AUDIO  
<sound type>  
Description  
5
Beep. Not supported  
6
Alarm. Not supported  
7
Calendar Tone. Not supported  
Calendar Click. Not supported  
Reserved. Not supported  
8
9-10  
11  
Melody 1  
12-20  
21-30  
31-38  
39-50  
Melody 2. Melody 10 reserved for pre-set melodies  
Reserved for melody 11-20. Not supported  
Own melody 1-8  
Reserved for own melodies. Not supported  
4.11 AT*EPRW  
Ericsson Personal Ringtype Write  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request Personal  
Ringtype Write  
command  
AT*EPRW=<indexr>,  
<number>,[<type>],  
<soundtype>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EPRW=?  
• *EPRW: (list of  
supported  
<indexr>s),<nlength  
>,(list of supported  
<type>s),(list of  
supported <sound  
type>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Writes phone number, phone number type and sound type in location  
number <indexr>. It is possible to use wild cards for phone number by  
substituting the digits with question marks. If writing fails an error,  
+CME ERROR: <err>, is returned.  
If all parameters but <indexr> are omitted, the personal ring type at  
position <indexr> will be deleted.  
<indexr>  
Description  
1-50  
Value of location number. The location number must be  
free. If the given location number is not free, ERROR is  
returned  
<number>  
Description  
string type  
phone number of format <type>  
143  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<type>  
Description  
Integer format  
Type of address octet  
(refer to GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7)  
128  
129  
Unknown numbering plan, national/international number  
unknown  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international  
number unknown  
145  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values refer to GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7  
161  
128 - 255  
<nlength>  
Description  
integer type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>  
<sound type>  
Description  
0
Off. Not supported  
1
Low ring signal  
2
Medium ring signal  
3
High ring signal  
4
Mixed ring signal  
5
Beep. Not supported  
6
Alarm. Not supported  
7
Calendar Tone. Not supported  
Calendar Click. Not supported  
Reserved. Not supported  
Melody 1  
8
9-10  
11  
12-30  
31-38  
39-50  
Melody 2. Melody 20 reserved for pre-set melodies  
Own melody 1-8  
Reserved for own melodies. Not supported  
144  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
4. AUDIO  
4.12 AT*ERIL  
Ericsson Ring Level Set  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets ring volume for the  
ring signals used for  
incoming voice (L1  
and L2), fax and data  
calls  
AT*ERIL=<volume>[,<c  
all type>  
[,<place>]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*ERIL?  
• *ERIL:  
<volume1>[,<call  
type1> [,<place1>  
[<CR><LF>…*ERIL:  
<volume n>[, <call  
type n> [,<place  
n>]]]]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ERIL=?  
• *ERIL: (list of  
supported  
<volume>s)[,(list of  
supported <call  
type>s)  
[,(list of supported  
<place>s)]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to set the volume for the ring signals used for incoming voice,  
Line 1, Line 2, fax and data calls. The parameter <place> controls the  
ring level set for different types of modes. The signal volume is  
specified as “step”, with an increasing volume for each signal, or as a  
selected level.  
Line 1 is the default for <call type> if the parameter is not given.  
<volume>  
Description  
0
Off  
1-6  
Volume setting, not increasing ring  
Volume setting, increasing ring  
129-134  
<calltype>  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
Line 1  
Line 2  
Fax  
Data  
Alarm. Not supported  
145  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<place>  
Description  
0
1
Hand held  
Car mounted  
4.13 AT*ERIN  
Ericsson Ring Set  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets ring type for  
AT*ERIN=  
<sound type>,  
[<call type>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
incoming voice (L1  
and L2), fax and data  
calls and alarm  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*ERIN?  
• *ERIN: <sound  
type1>,<call type1>  
[<CR><LF>…*ERIN:  
<sound type  
n>,<call type n>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ERIN=?  
• *ERIN: list of  
supported <sound  
type>s, list of  
supported <call  
type>s  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to set sound for incoming voice, line L1 and L2, fax, data calls and  
alarm. For each of the incoming call types and alarm: voice on line 1,  
voice on line 2, fax calls and data calls and alarm a sound type is  
selected.  
The type of sound is either a ring signal, selected from a predefined set,  
a melody, selected from a predefined set, or an own melody, selected  
from a set specified by the user.  
Line 1 is the default for <call type> if the parameter is not given.  
<call type>  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
Line 1  
Line 2  
Fax  
Data  
Alarm  
146  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
4. AUDIO  
<sound type>  
Description  
0
Off. Not supported  
1
Low ring signal  
2
Medium ring signal  
3
High ring signal  
4
Mixed ring signal  
5
Beep. Not supported  
6
Alarm. Not supported  
7
Calendar Tone. Not supported  
Calendar Click. Not supported  
Reserved. Not supported  
Melody 1. Melody 10 reserved for preset melodies  
Reserved. Not supported  
Own melodies 1-8  
8
9-10  
11-20  
21-30  
31-38  
39-5  
Reserved for own melodies. Not supported  
4.14 AT*ERIP  
Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Command  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Plays the selected  
sound type at  
specified volume level  
AT*ERIP =  
<volume>,<sound  
type>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ERIP=?  
• *ERIP: (list of  
supported  
<volume>s),(list of  
supported <sound  
type>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to play one of the sound types which are available as ring signals/  
message signals on the module. The signal volume may not be chosen  
as “step”; with an increasing volume for each signal. If value 1 is chosen  
for parameter <volume>, nothing should happen. Signal volume may be  
chosen as a selected level.  
<volume>  
Description  
0
Off  
1
Step. Not Supported  
Volume setting  
2-n  
Refer to the AT*ERIN command for the <sound type> parameter.  
147  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
4.15 AT*ESMA  
Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the answer mode  
settings in the MS  
AT*ESMA=<mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*ESMA?  
• *ESMA: <mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ESMA=?  
• *ESMA: list of  
supported <mode>s  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
<mode >  
Description  
0
1
2
Answer mode is not set to “Any key”, or “Auto” (off)  
Any Key mode on  
Auto mode on  
4.16 AT*ESOM Ericsson Settings Own Melody  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the own  
melodies in the  
MS  
AT*ESOM=  
[<melody index>],  
<melody string>  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the  
current setting  
AT*ESOM?  
• *ESOM: <melody index>  
,<melody string 1>, <CR><LF>  
……*ESOM: <melody index>,  
<melody string n>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*ESOM=?  
• *ESOM: (list of supported  
<melody index>),(list of  
supported <pause>s),(list of  
supported <prefix>s),(list of  
supported <tone>s),  
<mlength>,<mtones>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sets the user defined own melodies in the MS. The <prefix> and <tone>  
indicates together the tone frequency and duration. The <pause> sets a  
pause between tones.  
148  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
4. AUDIO  
Test command returns the possible values of <melody index>, <pause>,  
<prefix>, <tone>, <mlength> and <mtones>.  
<melody  
index>  
Description  
1-4  
Melody 1 – 4. Default setting: 1  
<melody  
string>  
Description  
string  
A sequence of <tones> and <pause> entries. The <tones>  
may be preceded by one or two <prefix>(s)  
<pause>  
Description  
p
Pause  
<prefix>  
Description  
#
Half tone higher  
Half tone lower  
(b)  
+
One octave higher  
<tones>  
Description  
c,d,e,f,g,a,b  
C,D,E,F,G,A,B  
Short tones  
Long tones  
<mtones>  
Description  
integer  
Indicating the maximum number of tones in a melody  
<mlength>  
Description  
integer  
Indicating the maximum length of <melody string>  
149  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
4.17 AT*EXVC  
Ericsson Set External Volume Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the maximum  
volume level on the  
audio lines  
AT*EXVC=<external  
volume>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*EXVC?  
• *EXVC: <external  
volume>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EXVC=?  
• *EXVC: (list of  
supported <external  
volume>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to set or query whether an external accessory such as the vehicle  
handsfree controls the audio volume.  
By default, the <external volume> is turned off, i.e. the volume over  
AFMS is controlled by the phone MMI.  
The set command is effective only as long as the phone senses that it is  
connected to an external accessory that has issued the command. Once  
the phone and the accessory are disconnected the <external volume>  
setting returns to default.  
<external  
volume>  
Description  
0
1
The phone MMI controls audio volume over AFMS  
Audio volume over AFMS is output at maximum level that  
is no clipping occurs. An external accessory such as a  
vehicle kit controls the actual volume level heard by the  
user  
150  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
4. AUDIO  
4.18 ATM  
Monitor Speaker Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set monitor speaker  
control  
ATM[=][<speaker>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATM?  
M: <speaker>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATM=?  
M: (list of supported  
<speaker>s)  
Define the activity of the speaker. This command is ignored by the  
modem and is only included for compatibility.  
<speaker>  
Description  
0
Off during the entire call. Default value  
1-3  
Different “on” modes  
151  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
152  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
5. Data - CSD/HSCSD  
Note!  
Since the module does not support V42bis compression the following  
commands have not been implemented:  
AT+DS  
AT+DR  
5.1 AT+CBST  
Select Bearer Service Type  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Select bearer service  
type  
AT+CBST=[<speed>,  
[<name>,[<ce>]]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CBST?  
• +CBST:  
<speed>,<name>,  
<ce>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CBST=?  
• +CBST: (list of supported  
<speed>s,list of  
supported <name>s, list  
of supported <ce>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects the bearer service <name> with data rate <speed>, and the  
connection element <ce> to be used when data calls are originated.  
Values may also be used during mobile terminated data call setup,  
especially in the case of single numbering scheme calls.  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as compound values.  
<speed>  
Description  
0
Auto selection of baud rate  
2400bps V.22bis  
4
6
4800bps V.32  
7
9600bps V.32  
12  
15  
68  
70  
9600bps V.34  
19200bps V.34  
2400bps V.110 (ISDN)  
4800bps V.110 (ISDN)  
153  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<speed>  
Description  
71  
75  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
9600bps V.110 (ISDN)  
14400bps V.110 (ISDN)  
19200bps V.110 (ISDN)  
28800bps V.110 (ISDN)  
38400bps V.110 (ISDN)  
48000bps V.110 (ISDN)  
56000bps V.110 (ISDN)  
<name>  
Description  
0
Asynchronous connection (UDI or 3.1kHz modem)  
<ce>  
Description  
1
Non transparent  
154  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
5. DATA - CSD/HSCSD  
5.2 AT+CRLP  
Radio Link Protocol  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set radio link  
protocol  
AT+CRLP=[<iws>  
[,<mws>[,<T1>  
[,<N2>[,<ver>  
[, <T4>]]]]]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the  
current setting  
AT+CRLP?  
• +CRLP:  
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<ver1>  
[,<T4>]][<CR><LF>  
• +CRLP:  
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<ver2>  
[,<T4>]][...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CRLP=?  
• +CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s),  
(list of supported <mws>s),  
(list of supported <T1>s),  
(list of supported<N2>s)[,<ver1>  
[,(list of supported <T4>s)]]  
[<CR><LF>+CRLP: (list of  
supported <iws>s), (list of  
supported <mws>s), (list of  
supported <T1>s), (list of  
supported <N2>s)[,<ver2>[,(list of  
supported <T4>s)]][...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Radio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when non-transparent data  
calls are originated may be altered with this command. Available  
command subparameters depend on the RLP versions implemented by  
the device (e.g. <ver> may not be available if device supports only  
versions 0 and 1).  
Read command returns current settings for each supported RLP version  
<verx>. Only RLP parameters applicable to the corresponding <verx>  
are returned.  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value. If ME/TA supports several RLP versions <verx>, the RLP  
parameter value ranges for each <verx> are returned in a separate line.  
<iws>  
Description  
120  
0 - 496  
IWF to MS window size  
<mws>  
Description  
120  
0 - 496  
MS to IWF window size  
155  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<T1>  
Description  
48  
38 - 100  
Acknowledgment timer T1 (*10ms)  
<N2>  
Description  
6
Re-transmission attempts N2  
0 - 255  
<T4>  
Description  
5
Re-sequencing period T4 (*10ms)  
3 - 255  
<ver>  
Description  
Integer  
RLP version. When version indication is not present,  
<ver>=0 is assumed  
Example  
AT+CRLP?  
+CRLP: 61,61,48,6,0  
+CRLP: 120,120,48,6,2,3  
OK  
156  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
6. Data - GPRS  
6.1 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Activate or deactivate  
the specified PDP  
context(s)  
+CGACT=[<state>  
[,<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
+CGACT?  
• +CGACT: <cid>,  
<state>[<CR><LF>  
+CGACT: <cid>,  
<state>[...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
+CGACT=?  
• +CGACT: (list of  
supported <state>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s).  
After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250 command  
state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is ignored  
and OK is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, ERROR  
or +CME: ERROR is returned. If the MS is not attached to the GPRS  
service when the activation form of the command is executed, the MS  
first performs a GPRS attach and then attempts to activate the specific  
contexts.  
If no <cid>s are specified the activation form of the command activates  
all defined contexts.  
If no <cid>s are specified the deactivation form of the command  
deactivates all active contexts.  
<state>  
Description  
0
1
PDP context activation deactivated  
PDP context activation activated  
<cid>  
Description  
Integer type  
A numeric parameter which specifies a specific PDP  
context definition  
157  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
6.2 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Attach or detach MS  
to the GPRS/packet  
domain/packet  
+CGATT=[<state>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
domain service  
Show the current  
setting  
+CGATT?  
• +CGATT: <state>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
+CGATT=?  
• +CGATT: (list of  
supported <state>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to attach the MS to, or detach the MS from, the GPRS/packet  
domain service. After the command has completed, the MS remains in  
V.250 command state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the  
command is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the requested  
state cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is  
returned. Extended error responses (enabled by the +CMEE command)  
Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the  
attachment state changes to detached.  
Note!  
This command has the characteristics of both the V.250 action and  
parameter commands. Hence it has the read form in addition to the  
execution/set and test forms.  
<state>  
Description  
0
1
Detached  
Attached  
158  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
6. DATA - GPRS  
6.3 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Establish GPRS/packet  
domain connection  
+CGDATA=[<L2p>,[cid  
[,cid>[,…]]]]  
• CONNECT  
• ERROR  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
+CGDATA=?  
• +CGDATA: (list of  
supported <L2P>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the MS to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish  
communication between the TE and the network using one or more  
GPRS/packet domain PDP types. This may include performing a  
GPRS/packet domain attach and one or more PDP context activations.  
<L2P>  
Description  
PPP  
Point-to-point protocol for a PDP such as IP  
159  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
6.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Select PDP  
context  
parameters  
+CGDCONT=[<cid>  
[,<PDP_type> [,<APN>  
[,<PDP_addr>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
[,<d_comp>  
[,<h_comp> [,<pd1>  
[,…[,pdN]]]]]]]]]  
Show the  
current setting  
+CGDCONT?  
• +CGDCONT: <cid>,  
<PDP_type>,<APN>,  
<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,  
<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]]  
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:  
<cid>, <PDP_type>,<APN>,  
<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,  
<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]]  
[...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
+CGDCONT=?  
• +CGDCONT: (range of  
supported <cid>s),  
<PDP_type>,,,(list of  
supported <d_comp>s),  
(list of supported <h_comp>s)  
[,(list of supported <pd1>s)  
[,…[,(list of supported  
<pdN>s)]]]  
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:  
(range of supported <cid>s),  
<PDP_type>,,,(list of  
supported <d_comp>s),  
(list of supported <h_comp>s)  
[,(list of supported  
<pd1>s)[,…[,(list of supported  
<pdN>s)]]] [...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by  
the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>.  
<cid>  
Description  
Integer type  
(PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which  
specifies a particular PDP context definition. The  
parameter is local to the TE-MS interface and is used in  
other PDP context-related commands. The range of  
permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the  
test form of the command  
1-10  
Supported values. Ericsson specific  
<PDP_type>  
Description  
IP  
Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)  
160  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
6. DATA - GPRS  
<APN>  
Description  
String type  
(Access Point Name) a string parameter which is a logical  
name that is used to select the GGSN or the external  
packet data network. If the value is null or omitted, then  
the subscription value will be requested  
<PDP_address>  
Description  
String type  
A string parameter that identifies the MS in the  
address space applicable to the PDP. If the value is  
null or omitted, then a value may be provided by  
the TE during the PDP startup procedure or, failing  
that, a dynamic address will be requested  
<d_comp>  
Description  
0
PDP data compression OFF  
PDP data compression ON  
Reserved  
1
2..255  
<h_comp>  
Description  
0
PDP header compression OFF  
PDP header compression ON  
Reserved  
1
2..255  
<pdN>  
Description  
String type  
Zero to N string parameters whose meanings are specific  
to the <PDP_type>  
161  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
6.5 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set command  
+CGEREP=[<mode>  
[,<bfr>]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
+CGEREP?  
• +CGEREP:  
<mode>,<bfr>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
+CGEREP=?  
• +CGEREP: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s),(list of  
supported <bfr>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes, +CGEV:  
XXX from MS to TE in the case of certain events occurring in the  
GPRS/packet domain MS or the network.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MS. No codes are  
forwarded to the TE  
1
Discard unsolicited result codes when MS-TE link is  
reserved; otherwise forward them directly to the TE  
<bfr>  
Description  
0
MS buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this  
command is cleared when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered  
162  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
6. DATA - GPRS  
6.6 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Show PDP addresses  
for specified CIDs  
+CGPADDR=[<cid>  
[,<cid> [,…]]]  
• +CGPADDR:  
<cid>,<PDP_addr>  
[<CR><LF>+CGPAD  
DR:  
<cid>,<PDP_addr>  
[...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
+CGPADDR=?  
• +CGPADDR: (list of  
defined <cid>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers. The  
test command returns a list of defined <cid>s.  
<cid>  
Description  
Integer type  
Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context  
definition (see +CGDCONT command). If no <cid> is  
specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are  
returned  
<PDP_address>  
Description  
String type  
A string that identifies the MS in the address space  
applicable to the PDP. The address may be static or  
dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by  
the +CGDCONT command when the context was  
defined. For a dynamic address it will be the one  
assigned during the last PDP context activation that  
used the context definition referred to by <cid>.  
<PDP_address> is omitted if none is available  
163  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
6.7 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set minimum  
acceptable  
profile  
+CGQMIN=[<cid>  
[,<precedence>  
[,<delay> [,<reliability>  
[,<peak>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
[,<mean>]]]]]]  
Show the  
current  
setting  
+CGQMIN?  
• +CGQMIN: <cid>,  
<precedence>, <delay>,  
<reliability>, <peak>,  
<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN:  
<cid>, <precedence>,  
<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,  
<mean>[…]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
+CGQMIN=?  
• +CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of  
supported <precedence>s),  
(list of supported <delay>s),  
(list of supported <reliability>s)  
, (list of supported <peak>s),  
(list of supported  
<mean>s)[<CR><LF>+CGQMI  
N: <PDP_type>, (list of  
supported <precedence>s),  
(list of supported <delay>s),  
(list of supported <reliability>s)  
, (list of supported <peak>s),  
(list of supported  
<mean>s)[…]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is  
checked by the MS against the negotiated profile returned in the  
Activate PDP Context Accept message.  
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the  
(local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same  
parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQMIN  
command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command.  
The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may  
be set to a separate value.  
A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN=<cid> causes the  
minimum acceptable profile for context number <cid> to become  
undefined. In this case no check is made against the negotiated profile.  
<cid>  
Description  
Integer type  
Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context  
definition  
164  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
6. DATA - GPRS  
<precedence>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Subscribed (from network) value used  
High priority  
Normal priority  
Low priority  
<delay>  
Description  
0
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Delay class  
1-4  
<reliability>  
Description  
0
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Reliability class  
1-5  
<peak>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Up to 1000 (8kbits/s)  
Up to 2000 (16kbits/s)  
Up to 4000 (32kbits/s)  
Up to 8000 (64kbits/s)  
Up to 16000 (128kbits/s)  
Up to 32000 (256kbits/s)  
Up to 64000 (512kbits/s)  
Up to 128000 (1024kbits/s)  
Up to 256000 (2048kbits/s)  
<mean>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Best effort  
100 (~0.22bits/s)  
200 (~0.44bits/s)  
500 (~1.11bits/s)  
1000 (~2.2bits/s)  
2000 (~4.4bits/s)  
5000 (~11.1bits/s)  
165  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<mean>  
Description  
8
10000 (~22bits/s)  
9
20000 (~44bits/s)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
31  
50000 (~111bits/s)  
100000 (~0.22kbits/s)  
200000 (~0.44kbits/s)  
500000 (~1.11kbits/s)  
1000000 (~2.2kbits/s)  
2000000 (~4.4kbits/s)  
5000000 (~11.1kbits/s)  
10000000 (~22kbits/s)  
20000000 (~44kbits/s)  
50000000 (~111kbits/s)  
6.8 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested)  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set quality  
of service  
profile  
+CGQREQ=[<cid>  
[,<precedence>  
[,<delay>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
[,<reliability>  
[,<peak>  
[,<mean>]]]]]]  
Show the  
current  
setting  
+CGQREQ?  
• +CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence>,  
<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,  
<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ:  
<cid>, <precedence>, <delay>,  
<reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[…]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command  
is supported  
+CGQREQ=?  
• +CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,  
(list of supported <precedence>s),  
(list of supported <delay>s),  
(list of supported <reliability>s),  
(list of supported <peak>s),  
(list of supported <mean>s)  
[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,  
(list of supported <precedence>s),  
(list of supported <delay>s),  
(list of supported <reliability>s),  
(list of supported <peak>s),  
(list of supported <mean>s)[…]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Allows the TE to specify a quality of service profile that is used when  
the MS sends an activate PDP context request message to the network.  
166  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
6. DATA - GPRS  
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the  
(local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same  
parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQREQ  
command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command.  
The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may  
be set to a separate value.  
A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid> causes the  
requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.  
<cid>  
Description  
Integer type  
Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context  
definition  
<precedence>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Subscribed (from network) value used  
High priority  
Normal priority  
Low priority  
<delay>  
Description  
0
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Delay class  
1-4  
<reliability>  
Description  
0
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Reliability class  
1-5  
<peak>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Up to 1000 (8kbits/s)  
Up to 2000 (16kbits/s)  
Up to 4000 (32kbits/s)  
Up to 8000 (64kbits/s)  
Up to 16000 (128kbits/s)  
Up to 32000 (256kbits/s)  
Up to 64000 (512kbits/s)  
Up to 128000 (1024kbits/s)  
Up to 256000 (2048kbits/s)  
167  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<mean>  
Description  
0
Subscribed (from network) value used  
Best effort  
1
2
100 (~0.22bits/s)  
3
200 (~0.44bits/s)  
4
500 (~1.11bits/s)  
5
1000 (~2.2bits/s)  
6
2000 (~4.4bits/s)  
7
5000 (~11.1bits/s)  
8
10000 (~22bits/s)  
9
20000 (~44bits/s)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
31  
50000 (~111bits/s)  
100000 (~0.22kbits/s)  
200000 (~0.44kbits/s)  
500000 (~1.11kbits/s)  
1000000 (~2.2kbits/s)  
2000000 (~4.4kbits/s)  
5000000 (~11.1kbits/s)  
10000000 (~22kbits/s)  
20000000 (~44kbits/s)  
50000000 (~111kbits/s)  
168  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
6. DATA - GPRS  
6.9 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set command  
AT+CGREG=[<n>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CGREG?  
• +CGREG:  
<n>,<stat>[,<lac>,  
<ci>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CGREG=?  
• +CGREG: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>  
when <n>=1 and there is a change in the GPRS/packet domain network  
registration status of the MS, or code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]  
when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.  
Note!  
If the GPRS/Packet Domain MS also supports circuit mode services, the  
+CGREG command and +CGREG: result code apply to the registration  
status and location information for those services.  
<n>  
Description  
0
1
2
Disable network registration unsolicited result code  
Enable network registration unsolicited result code  
Enable network registration and location information  
unsolicited result code  
<stat>  
Description  
0
Not registered, MS is not searching for a new operator to  
register with  
1
2
Registered, home network  
Not registered, but MS is searching for a new operator to  
register with  
3
4
5
Registration denied  
Unknown  
Registered, roaming  
<lac>  
Description  
String type  
Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format  
169  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<ci>  
String type  
Description  
Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format  
Example  
AT+CGREG?  
+CGREG: 0,3  
OK  
6.10 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set service or service  
preference  
+CGSMS=[<service>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
+CGSMS?  
• +CGSMS: <service>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
+CGSMS=?  
• +CGSMS: (list of  
available  
<service>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to specify the service or service preference that the MS will use to  
send MO SMS messages. The read command returns the currently  
selected service or service preference.  
<services>  
Description  
2
GPRS/packet domain preferred (use circuit switched if  
GPRS/packet domain not available)  
3
Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS/packet domain if  
circuit switched not available)  
170  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
7. Data - HSCSD  
7.1 AT+CHSC  
HSCSD Current Call Parameters  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CHSC  
• +CHSC:<rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CHSC=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns information about the current HSCSD call parameters, i.e. the  
current number of receive and transmit timeslots, air interface user rate  
and channel coding.  
<rx>  
Description  
0
1
2
No HSCSD call is active. See also note below  
The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 1  
The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 2  
<tx>  
Description  
0
1
No HSCSD call is active. See also note below  
The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 1  
<aiur>  
Description  
0
1
3
No HSCSD call is active. See also note below.  
Current air interface user rate is 9.6kbits/s  
Current air interface user rate is 19.2kbits/s  
<coding>  
Description  
0
4
8
No HSCSD call is active. See also note  
Current channel coding is 9.6kbits/s (TCH/F9.6)  
Current channel coding is 14.4kbits/s (TCH/F14.4)  
171  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
7.2 AT+CHSD  
HSCSD Device Parameters  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CHSD  
• +CHSD:  
<mclass>,<maxRx>,  
<maxTx>,<sum>,<codings>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CHSD=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows information about HSCSD features supported by the ME/TA.  
<mclass>  
Description  
2
Multislot class is 2  
<maxRx>  
Description  
2
Maximum number of receive timeslots that ME can use is 2  
<maxTx>  
Description  
1
Maximum number of transmit timeslots that ME can use is 1  
<sum>  
Description  
3
Total number of receive and transmit timeslots that ME  
can use at the same time is 3 (i.e. 2+1). The following  
applies in a HSCSD call: 2 (receive slots) + (transmit slots)  
<sum>  
<codings>  
Description  
4
Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next  
established non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6kbits/s only  
172  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
7. DATA - HSCSD  
7.3 AT+CHSN  
HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set HSCSD  
AT+CHSN=[<wAiur>  
[,<wRx>[,<topRx>  
[,<codings>]]]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
configuration. This  
command is also used  
during a call if new  
<wAiur> and/or <wRx>  
are/is desired  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CHSN?  
• +CHSN: <wAiur>,  
<wRx>, <topRx>,  
<codings>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CHSN=?  
• +CHSN: (list of  
supported <wAiur>s),  
(list of supported  
<wRx>s), (list of  
supported <topRx>s),  
(list of supported  
<codings>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Controls parameters for non-transparent HSCSD calls. Changing  
<topRx> or <codings> during a call does not affect the current call.  
Changing <wAiur> or <wRx> affects the current call only if <topRx>  
was non-zero when the call was established. When using the command  
in this way it comes in the “action” command category. This is what is  
referred to as user initiated up- and down-grading in GSM 02.34 and  
GSM 03.34.  
Note!  
Recommended value for parameter <speed> in AT+CBST is 0.  
<wAiur>  
Description  
0
TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receive  
timeslots from currently selected fixed network user rate  
(<speed> parameter from +CBST command, and  
<codings>, and <wRx> (or <maxRx> from +CHSD  
command if <wRx>=0)  
1
2
3
4
Wanted air interface user rate is 9.6kbit/s  
Wanted air interface user rate is 14.4kbit/s  
Wanted air interface user rate is 19.2kbit/s  
Wanted air interface user rate is 28.8kbit/s  
173  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<wRx>  
Description  
0
TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receive  
timeslots from currently selected <wAiur> and <codings>  
See note below  
1
2
Wanted number of receive timeslots is 1  
Wanted number of receive timeslots is 2  
<topRx>  
Description  
0
Indicates that the user is not going to change <wAiur>  
and /or <wRx> during the next call  
1
2
Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during  
the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 1  
Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during  
the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 2  
<codings>  
Description  
4
Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next  
established non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6kbit/s only  
7.4 AT+CHSR  
HSCSD Parameters Report  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set HSCSD parameters  
reporting on or off  
AT+CHSR=[<mode>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CHSR?  
• +CHSR: <mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CHSR=?  
• +CHSR: (list of  
supported  
<modes>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
With this command enabled, the intermediate result code +CHSR:  
<rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding> is returned (from TA to TE) when an  
HSCSD call is being set up. The result code represents the current  
(negotiated or renegotiated) HSCSD parameters. If enabled, the  
intermediate result code is transmitted at the point of the call setup  
negotiation, where the ME/TA has determined what type of HSCSD  
connection will be used. Result code transmission is done after possible  
service (CR), error control (+ER), and/or compression (+DR) reporting,  
174  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
7. DATA - HSCSD  
but before possible TE-TA rate (+ILRR) reporting and before the  
intermediate result code CONNECT is transmitted. The format of the  
intermediate result code is:  
+CHSR: <rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>  
For the value definitions, refer to “AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call  
Parameters”, page 171. For instance, for a non-transparent HSCSD call,  
result code ‘CHSR: 2, 1, 4, 8’ means that the call has two timeslots  
downlink, one timeslot uplink, the air interface user rate is 28.8 kbits/s  
and the used channel coding is  
TCH/F14.4.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Disable reporting  
Enable reporting  
Itermediate Result Codes:  
+CHSR: <rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>  
7.5 AT+CHSU  
HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set HSCSD automatic  
user initiated  
upgrading on or off  
AT+CHSU=[<mode>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CHSU?  
• +CHSU=<mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CHSU=?  
• +CHSU: (list of  
supported  
<modes>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Enables or disables the HSCSD automatic user-initiated upgrade.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Disable use of UP bit for upgrading. Default value  
Enable use of UP bit for upgrading  
175  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
176  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
8. GPS Interoperability  
8.1 AT*EENMEA NMEA (GPS) Mode on UART2  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Enable NMEA  
commands on the  
UART  
AT*EENMEA=<mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
• +CME ERROR: < err>  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*EENMEA?  
AT*EENMEA=?  
• *EENMEA:<mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Shows if the command  
is supported  
• *EENMEA: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• +CME ERROR: < err>  
This command enables transmission of NMEA commands from  
UART1 to UART2 and vice versa. The module acts as a transparent link  
between the GPS device connected to UART2 and the application  
communicating with it on UART1.  
When the application sends the command AT*EENMEA=2 the module  
is able to handle both AT and NMEA commands simultaneously. If the  
OK response is received the application can start handling both NMEA  
and AT commands. Otherwise the response ERROR is returned.  
In the mode with simultaneous AT and NMEA commands, <CR> is  
required after each NMEA command and after the last AT command  
before the new NMEA. NMEA commands must start with a $. All  
NMEA commands are forwarded to UART2. All NMEA responses  
from UART2 are displayed as responses to UART1 along with AT  
responses.  
By sending AT*EENMEA=0, the application ends AT and NMEA  
commands, simultaneous handling mode. It sends OK, and then returns  
to AT mode.  
The port rate of UART1 for NMEA commands can be controlled using  
the AT*NMPR command.  
Responses  
Description  
OK  
The requested action has been performed  
ERROR  
Following causes of error are considered:  
- incorrect syntax  
- NMEA commands have already been enabled in other  
07.10 channels  
177  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<mode>  
Description  
0
2
Disable NMEA communication. Default value  
Enable NMEA communication simultaneously with AT  
commands  
8.2 AT*E2NMPR Ericsson M2M Set NMEA (GPS) Port Rate  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request operation to  
set data rate for GPS/  
NMEA Port  
AT*E2NMPR=<pr>  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*E2NMPR?  
AT*E2NMPR=?  
*E2NMPR: <pr>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
• *E2NMPR: (list of  
supported <pr>s)  
• ERROR  
This command allows the user to set the physical Data rate for the GPS/  
NMEA port. The port rate will be set for the GPS/NMEA port only  
when NMEA is active - see AT*EENMEA.  
<op>  
Description  
o
1
600 Baud rate  
1200 Baud rate  
2
2400 Baud rate  
3
4800 Baud rate  
4
9600 Baud rate. Default value  
19200 Baud rate  
38400 Baud rate  
57600 Baud rate  
115200 Baud rate  
230400 Baud rate  
460800 Baud rate  
5
6
7
8
9
10  
Examples  
AT*E2NMPR=?  
*E2NMPR=(0-10)  
OK  
Port rate currently set:  
178  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
8. GPS INTEROPERABILITY  
AT*E2NMPR?  
*E2NMPR: 4  
OK  
Set GPS/NMEA port rate to 4800 baud:  
AT*E2NMPR=2  
OK  
179  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
180  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
9. Fax  
9.1 AT*E2FAX  
Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request change of fax  
comm. baud rate  
AT*E2FAX= <RcV>  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*E2FAX?  
• *E2FAX: <RcV>  
• ERROR  
Shows if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2FAX=?  
• *E2FAX: (list of  
supported <RcV>s)  
• ERROR  
This command allows the modification of the factory default RS232  
comm. setting between standard 9600 baud and 19200 baud. This is  
needed as the addition of fax capabilities, within the module, require  
communication between fax applications and the module to run at a  
higher baud rate than the fax transmission baud rate (In this case the  
fastest transmission rate is 9600 baud). Once this command has been  
performed, the user must then execute the AT&F command to reset the  
module with the new RS232 comm's baud rate.  
The AT*E2FAX command allows the user to:  
• “Configure” the RS232 Comm. speed default factory profile,  
specifying whether the speed should be 9600 baud (standard) or  
19200 baud for FAX application comm. This value will then be used  
once the AT&F command is next used.  
• “Read” what value this default factory profile has been set to.  
<RcV>  
Description  
0
1
Configure RS232 default setting to 9600 baud  
Configure RS232 default setting to 19200 baud  
Examples  
AT*E2FAX=?  
*E2FAX= (0-1)  
OK  
181  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
AT*E2FAX?  
*E2FAX: 0  
OK  
(Current default setting is 19200 baud)  
(Sets default RS232 setting to 9600 baud)  
AT*E2FAX=0  
OK  
9.2 Low Level Fax Commands  
The following table of low level fax commands are supported and used  
by the GM47 for fax operation.  
AT+FAA  
AT+FBADLIN  
AT+FBUG  
AT+FCQ  
AT+FDFFC  
AT+FDT  
AT+FBADMUL  
AT+FCIG  
AT+FCR  
AT+FBOR  
AT+FCLASS  
AT+FDCC  
AT+FDR  
AT+FDIS  
AT+FECM  
AT+FLID  
AT+FET  
AT+FK  
AT+FLNFC  
AT+FMFR?  
AT+FMM?  
AT+FPTS  
AT+FLPL  
AT+FMI?  
AT+FMR?  
AT+FRBC  
AT+FRH  
AT+FMDL?  
AT+FMINSP  
AT+FPHCTO  
AT+FREL  
AT+FREV?  
AT+FRS  
AT+FRM  
AT+FSPL  
AT+FTM  
AT+FTBC  
AT+FTS  
AT+FTH  
AT+FVRFC  
AT+FWDFC  
182  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
10. Identification  
10.1 AT  
Attention Command  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Checks the communication  
between the MS and  
application  
AT  
• OK  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
This command is used to determine the presence of an MS. If the MS  
supports AT commands, it returns an OK final result code.  
10.2 AT&F  
Set to Factory Defined Configuration  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Execute  
AT&F  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT&F=?  
&F: (list of supported  
<profile>s)  
This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to default values  
specified by the manufacturer, which may take in consideration  
hardware configuration and other manufacturer defined criteria.  
10.3 AT&W  
Store User Profile  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Stores the current user  
profile to non volatile  
memory  
AT&W=[<pr>] or  
AT&W[<pr>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT&W=?  
&W: (list of supported  
<pr>s)  
This command stores the current user profile in non-volatile memory.  
< pr>  
Description  
0
Stores current settings in User Profile 0  
183  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
             
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
10.4 AT*  
List all Supported AT Commands  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
List all implemented AT  
commands  
AT*  
<AT Command1>  
[<CR> <LF>  
<AT Command2>[…]]  
/
<AT Command1>  
[<CR> <LF>  
<AT Command2>[…]]  
Lists all the commands supported by the MS.  
10.5 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request manufacturer  
identification  
AT+CGMI  
• <manufacturer>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CGMI=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text.  
<manufacturer>  
Description  
Sony Ericsson  
This company’s name is displayed  
Example  
AT+CGMI  
Sony Ericsson  
OK  
10.6 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request the model  
identification  
AT+CGMM  
• <model type>  
<model name>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CGMM=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text <model>,  
determined by the MS manufacturer. It is intended to permit the user of  
the ITAE/ETAE to identify the specific model of the MS to which it is  
184  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
           
10. IDENTIFICATION  
connected. Typically the text will consist of a single line containing the  
name of the product, but manufacturers may choose to provide more  
information if desired.  
<model type>  
Description  
String type  
A unique ASCII character/digit string, always 10  
characters long. Spaces are used when the number of  
characters/digits is less than 10  
<model name>  
Description  
String type  
Model name for the transceiver unit, for example, GM47  
Example  
AT+CGMM  
6100501-BVGM47  
OK  
10.7 AT+CGMR Read MS Revision Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request MS revision  
identification string  
AT+CGMR  
• <revision>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CGMR=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command causes the MS to return a string containing information  
about the software version.  
<revision>  
Description  
String type  
An ASCII string containing date (year, month, day, hour,  
minute) plus KRC number.  
Example: 9710051610 CXC125112  
185  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
10.8 AT+CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request product serial  
number  
AT+CGSN  
• <sn>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CGSN=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command causes the MS to return the IMEI (International Mobile  
station Equipment Identity), which identifies the individual ME.  
<sn>  
Description  
String  
The IMEISV, which is the IMEI (International Mobile station  
Equipment Identity; refer GSM 03.03) number of the ME and the  
software version number. Text shall not contain the sequence  
0<CR> or OK<CR>  
10.9 AT+GMI  
Read Manufacturer Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request manufacturer  
identification  
AT+GMI  
<manufacturer>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+GMI=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of  
information text. Typically, the text will consist of a single line  
containing the name of the manufacturer, but may provide more  
information such as address and telephone number for customer  
service.  
<manufacture>  
Description  
string type  
The total number of characters, including line  
terminators, in the information text returned in response  
to this command shall not exceed 2048 characters.  
Note that the information text shall not contain the  
sequence “0” or “OK”, so that DTE can avoid false  
detection of the end of this information text  
186  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
10. IDENTIFICATION  
10.10 AT+GMM Read Model Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request revision  
identification  
AT+GMM  
<model>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+GMM=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of  
information text, determined by the manufacturer, which is intended to  
permit the user of the DCE to identify the specific model of device.  
Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the name of  
the product, but manufacturers may choose to provide any information  
desired.  
<model>  
Description  
string type  
The total number of characters, including line terminators,  
in the information text returned in response to this  
command shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note that  
the information text shall not contain the sequence “0 ” or  
“OK”, so that DTE can avoid false detection of the end of  
this information text  
10.11 AT+GMR Read Revision Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request revision  
identification  
AT+GMR  
<revision>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+GMR=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command returns a manufacturer specified software revision name  
in a text string.  
<revision>  
Description  
string type  
The total number of characters, including line terminators,  
in the information text returned in response to this  
command shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note that  
the information text shall not contain the sequence “0” or  
“OK”, so that DTE can avoid false detection of the end of  
this information text.  
Example  
AT+GMR  
R2A009prgCXC1122112  
187  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
10.12 ATI  
Identification Information  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Execute  
ATI[<value>]  
<information>  
This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of text,  
followed by a final result code. As an option, <value> can be used to  
select from among multiple types of identifying information as shown  
in the table below.  
This command provides compatibility with Microsoft Windows 95.  
<value>  
Description  
0
Same information as +GMM command (model  
identification)  
1
Same information as +GMR command (revision  
identification)  
3
5
7
Modem model description  
Active settings  
Modem configuration profile (brief listing of the modem  
functionality: fax classes, Bluetooth, IrDA, modem type,  
etc.)  
8
9
DCE hardware type version  
PnP (plug and play) information  
Examples  
ATI=1  
CXC1122112  
ATI=5  
Configuration Settings on Channel 0  
&C: 1  
&D: 0  
*EENMEA: 0  
+CGACT: 1,0  
+CGATT: 0  
+CGDCONT: 1,“IP”,“internet”,“”,0,0  
+CGEREP: 0,0  
+CGREG: 0,3  
+CHSR: 0  
+CHSU: 0  
+CMEE: 1  
+CMUX: 0,0,1,31,10,3,30,10,2  
+CR: 0  
188  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
10. IDENTIFICATION  
+CRC: 0  
+CRLP: 61,61,48,6,0  
+CRLP: 120,120,48,6,2,3  
+CVHU: 2  
+ICF: 3,3  
+IFC: 2,2  
+ILRR: 0  
+IPR: 115200  
E: 1  
M: 0  
Q: 0  
S0: 000  
S10: 002  
S2: 043  
S3: 013  
S4: 010  
S5: 008  
S6: 002  
S7: 050  
S8: 002  
V: 1  
X: 4  
OK  
189  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
190  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
11. Input/Output  
11.1 AT*E2IO  
Ericsson M2M Input/Output Read/Write  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request operation  
with the I/O signals  
AT*E2IO=<op>,<io>  
[,<val>][,<adc_val>]  
• ERROR  
• OK  
• *E2IO: <op>,<io>[,[<val>]  
[,<adc_val>]]  
OK  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2IO=?  
• *E2IO: (list of supported  
<op>s), <io>s,(list of  
supported <val>s),(list of  
supported <adc_val>s)  
• ERROR  
Description:  
The module has 8 digital I/Os; 4 configurable GPIOs, 1 input-only, and  
3 output-only.  
The module also has 3 ADCs, and 1 DAC. All of these signals are  
controlled by the AT*E2IO command.  
Note!  
IO1 to IO4 are set to INPUT as a factory default. Their status (Input/  
Output) is stored in non-volatile memory.  
Set command controls the operations with the I/O signals for the M2M  
devices. It is possible to perform up to 5 operations. These operations  
have the following meaning:  
Read (<op> = 0): It reads the state of the specified signal. It returns  
the binary state of digital signals or value (0-255) of an ADC input  
or the DAC output. In case of a digital I/O the command has the  
following syntax:  
AT*E2IO=0,“IO1”  
*E2IO: 0,“IO1”,0  
OK  
If reading from the ADC/DACs:  
AT*E2IO=0,“AD1”  
*E2IO: 0,“AD1”,,62  
OK  
191  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Write (<op> = 1): Sets an output to a specific value. For digital  
sources <val>=‘0’ or ‘1’ and for the analog ones, 0-255. If the signal  
is bi-directional (IO1 to IO4) it must be configured as an output  
before writing is allowed. If the output can be written to, the signal is  
set to <val> and OK is returned, otherwise ERROR is returned.  
AT*E2IO=1,“IO1”,1  
OK  
or  
AT*E2IO=1,“DA1”,,100  
OK  
Configure (<op> = 2): The configuration operation is used for the  
bi-directional signals (IO1 to IO4). They can be configured as input,  
<val>= ‘0’ or output, <val>=‘1’. If the signal is not configurable,  
ERROR is returned in place of OK. Once set, the signal remains  
configured even after a power cycle. Example shown below:  
AT*E2IO=2,“IO1”,1 (Set IO1 as an output)  
OK  
Configure Check (<op> = 3): This operation reads the current  
configuration of the signal. Returned <val> is current signal state. If  
the signal is configurable, the current state and OK are returned, if  
not ERROR is returned.  
AT*E2IO=3,“IO1”  
*E2IO: 3,“IO1”,1  
(IO1 is currently set as an output)  
OK  
Trigger (<op> = 4): Input signals can be set to send an unsolicited  
result code whenever a change in one of the inputs has been  
produced. Setting a trigger (<val> = ‘1’) will cause the unsolicited  
result to be sent when a change from the current signal state occurs  
(signal must be unchanging when command is executed). Clearing a  
trigger (<val> = ‘0’) will clear a currently set trigger. Configurable  
signals (IO1 to IO4) must be set as inputs before they can be  
triggered. Triggers are only applicable while the module is ON.  
Power-cycling will clear all current triggers. If a signal is triggerable  
OK is returned and the trigger is set/cleared, otherwise ERROR is  
returned.  
AT*E2IO=4,“I5”,1  
OK  
(Set trigger on I5)  
(I5 changes state, sometime later)  
192  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
11. INPUT/OUTPUT  
*E2IO: 3,“I5”,1  
(I5 triggered, current state ‘1’)  
Trigger Check (<op> = 5): Checks if a signal input is configured as  
a trigger. Returned <val> shows the current trigger state; ‘1’ for  
triggered or ‘0’ for not triggered. If the signal is triggerable, the  
current trigger status and OK are return, otherwise ERROR is  
returned.  
AT*E2IO=5,“I5”  
*E2IO: 5,“I5”,1  
(I5 is currently set to trigger)  
OK  
The test command returns the supported I/Os and allowed value ranges.  
Abortability:  
This command may not be aborted.  
<op>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
Read  
Write  
Configure  
Configure Check  
Trigger  
Trigger Check  
<io>  
Description  
“IO1”  
“IO2”  
“IO3”  
“IO4”  
“I5”  
Digital Input 1. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3,4,5  
Digital Input 2. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3,4,5  
Digital Input 3. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3,4,5  
Digital Input 4. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3,4,5  
Digital Input 5. Supported Operations: 0,4,5  
“O5”  
“O6”  
“O7”  
“DA1”  
“AD1”  
“AD2”  
“AD3”  
Digital Output 5. Supported Operations: 0,1  
Digital Output 6. Supported Operations: 0,1  
Digital Output 7. Supported Operations: 0,1  
Digital/Analogue Input: Supported Operations: 0,1  
Analogue/Digital Output 1: Supported Operations: 0  
Analogue/Digital Output 2: Supported Operations: 0  
Analogue/Digital Output 3: Supported Operations: 0  
193  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<val>  
Description  
Configure  
Read/Write  
Trigger  
0
1
The logic value is  
FALSE  
I/O signal is INPUT  
I/O signal is NOT set  
to trigger  
Logic value is TRUE  
I/O signal is OUTPUT  
I/O signal is set to  
trigger  
<adc_val>  
Description  
0-255  
The decimal value shall represent the analogue voltage it  
is hold on the I/O. Applicable only to A/D or D/A signals.  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*E2IO: <source>, <io>, <val>  
Scenario Cases  
Reading an I/O:  
AT Command  
Response  
Comment  
AT*E2IO=0,“I1”  
The TE is requesting for the  
logic value of I1 (Digital Input  
1)  
*E2IO:0,“I1”,1  
OK  
The MS responds I1 has a TRUE  
logic value  
AT*E2IO=0,“AD1”  
The TE is requesting for the  
reading of AD1 value  
(Analogue Input 1)  
*E2IO:0,“AD1”, ,87  
OK  
The MS responds AD1 has a  
decimal value of 87. In volts:  
((2.75*0.9)/256)*87 = 0.841V  
Writing in an Output:  
AT Command  
Response  
Comment  
AT*E2IO=1,“O1”,1  
The TE is requesting to write a  
TRUE logic to O1 (Digital  
Output 1)  
OK  
The MS responds OK because  
the operation has been  
performed  
AT*E2IO=1,“I3”,0  
The TE is requesting to write a  
FALSE logic value to I3 (Digital  
Input 3)  
ERROR  
The MS responds ERROR  
because the operation is not  
possible  
194  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
11. INPUT/OUTPUT  
AT Command  
Response  
Comment  
AT*E2IO=1,“DA1”,95  
The TE is writing 95 decimal  
value to hold a voltage of:  
((2.75*0.9)/256)*95 = 0.918V  
OK  
The MS responds OK because  
the operation has been  
performed  
Configuring an I/O:  
AT Command  
Response  
Comment  
AT*E2IO=2,“I1”,0  
or  
AT*E2IO=2,“O1”,0  
The TE is requesting to  
configure IO1 as an input  
OK  
The MS responds OK because  
the operation has been  
performed  
AT*E2IO=2,“I4”,1  
or  
AT*E2IO=2,“O4”,1  
The TE is requesting to  
configure IO4 as an output  
OK  
The MS responds OK because  
the operation has been  
performed  
Checking an I/O status:  
AT Command  
Response  
Comment  
AT*E2IO=3,“I1”  
or  
AT*E2IO=3,“O1”  
The TE is requesting to check  
the configuration of the IO1  
signal  
*E2IO:3,“I1”,0  
The MS responds IO1 is  
configured as an input  
OK  
or  
*E2IO:3,“O1”,0  
OK  
AT*E2IO=3,“I4”  
or  
AT*E2IO=3,“O4”  
The TE is requesting to check  
the configuration of the IO4  
signal  
*E2IO:3,“I4”,1  
The MS responds IO4 is  
configured as an output  
OK  
or  
*E2IO:3,“O4”,1  
OK  
195  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Triggering an Input:  
AT Command  
Response  
Comment  
AT*E2IO=4,“I1”,1  
The TE is requesting to trigger  
Input 1  
OK  
The MS responds OK because  
the operation has been  
performed  
AT*E2IO=4,“I4”,0  
The TE is requesting to not  
trigger Input 4  
OK  
The MS responds OK because  
the operation has been  
performed  
*E2IO:4,“I1”,1  
OK  
An event has occurred. The  
input 1 has triggered on  
changing the input to logic  
value 1  
Checking an Input Trigger:  
AT Command  
Response  
Comment  
AT*E2IO=5,“I1”  
The TE is requesting the trigger  
state of the Input 1  
*E2IO=5,“I1”,1  
OK  
The MS responds that I1 has its  
trigger active  
196  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
12. Interface  
12.1 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control  
12.2 AT&C  
Circuit 109 (DCD) Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set behavior of carrier  
detect  
AT&C[<value>]  
OK  
ERROR  
Determines the behaviour of the carrier detect.  
<value>  
Description  
0
1
DCD always on  
DCD follows the connection. Default value  
12.3 AT&D  
Circuit 108 (DTR) Response  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Control actions from  
DTE  
AT&D[<value>]  
OK  
ERROR  
Controls all actions initiated by data terminal ready from DTE.  
<value>  
Description  
0
1
Ignore. Default value  
When in on-line data mode, switch to on-line command  
mode. For all other states, see <value>=2  
2
Disconnect and switch to off-line command mode  
12.4 AT&S  
Circuit 107 (DSR) Response  
This command is not availalbe in software releases up to and including  
R2A.  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set behaviour of data  
set ready  
AT&S[<value>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
197  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
               
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Determines the behaviour of the data set ready signal.  
<value>  
Description  
0
1
DSR always on  
DSR on in data mode. DSR off in command mode. Default  
value  
12.5 AT+WS46  
Mode Selection  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the cellular  
protocol mode  
AT+WS46=n  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+WS46?  
• <n> OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+WS46=?  
• (list of supported <n>s) OK  
• ERROR  
Allows an accessory to query and control the cellular protocol mode of  
the phone.  
<n> parameter  
Description  
12  
This value is used for GSM at 900 Mhz., DCS-1800, and  
PCS-1900 phones  
12.6 ATE  
Command Echo  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request Command  
Echo  
ATE[<value>]  
ATE=[<value>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATE?  
<value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATE=?  
E: (list of supported  
<value>s)  
The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE echoes  
characters received from the DTE during command state and online  
command state.  
<value>  
Description  
0
DCE does not echo characters during command state and  
online command state  
1
DCE echoes characters during command state and online  
command state. Default value  
198  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
12. INTERFACE  
12.7 ATV  
DCE Response Format  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set DCE response  
format  
ATV[=]<value>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
ATV?  
V: <value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
ATV=?  
V: (list of supported  
<value>s)  
Select either descriptive or numeric response codes. The ATV  
command sets the verbose numeric response codes and strips off the  
<S3><S4> additions to the command response.  
<value>  
Description  
0
1
Display numeric result codes  
Display verbose result codes. Default value  
List of result codes  
ATV1/ATV=1  
ATV0/ATV=0  
Description  
OK  
0
1
Acknowledges execution of a  
command  
CONNECT  
A connection has been established;  
the DCE is moving from command  
state to online data state  
RING  
2
3
The DCE has detected an incoming  
call signal from the network  
NO CARRIER  
The connection has been terminated  
or the attempt to establish a  
connection failed  
ERROR  
4
Command not recognized, command  
line maximum length exceeded,  
parameter value invalid, or other  
problem with processing the command  
line  
NO DIALTONE  
BUSY  
6
7
8
No dial tone detected  
Engaged (busy) signal detected  
NO ANSWER  
@” (Wait for Quiet Answer) dial  
modifier was used, but remote ringing  
followed by five seconds of silence was  
not detected before expiration of the  
connection timer  
CONNECT  
<TEXT>  
Manufacturer  
-specific  
Same as CONNECT, but includes  
manufacturer-specific text that may  
specify DTE speed, line speed, error  
control, data compression, or other  
status  
199  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
12.8 ATZ  
Reset to Default Configuration  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Execute  
ATZ  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Execute  
ATZ=<profile>  
ATZ=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if supported and  
list available  
parameter range  
Z: (list of supported  
<profile>s)  
This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to their default  
values as specified by the user. Consider hardware configuration  
switches or non-volatile parameter storage (if implemented) when using  
this command.  
Commands included on the same command line as the Z command will  
be ignored.  
<profile >  
Description  
0
Select the user profile to restore  
12.9 AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Switch to 07.10  
AT+CMUX=<transpa  
rency>[,<subset>[,  
<port_speed>[,<N1>  
[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>  
[,<T3>[,<k>]]]]]]]]  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CMUX?  
• +CMUX:<transparency>,  
<subset>,<port_speed>,<N1>  
,<T1>,<N2>,<T2>,<T3>[,<k>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMUX=?  
• +CMUX: (list of supported  
<transparency>s),  
(list of supported <subset>s),  
(list of supported  
<port_speed>s),  
(list of supported <N1>s),  
(list of supported <T1>s),  
(list of supported <N2>s),  
(list of supported <T2>s),  
(list of supported <T3>s),  
(list of supported <k>)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
The command is used to turn on the multiplexer. Only “no transparency  
is supported”. The parameter <k> is not used.  
200  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
12. INTERFACE  
The default values for the parameters below are for “no transparency”  
and “only UIH frames used”.  
<transparency>  
Description  
0
No transparency  
<subset>  
Description  
0
Only UIH frames used  
<port_speed>  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9600bits/s  
19200bits/s  
38400bits/s  
57600bits/s  
115200bits/s  
230400bits/s  
460800bits/s  
<N1>  
Description  
31  
Default maximum frame size  
<T1>  
Description  
10  
100ms default timer  
<N2>  
Description  
3
Default maximum number of re-transmissions  
<T2>  
Description  
30  
300ms default timer  
<T3>  
Description  
10  
10s default timer  
<k>  
Description  
1..7  
Window size  
201  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
12.10 AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Restore settings  
AT+CRES[=<profile>]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CRES=?  
• +CRES: (list of  
supported  
<profile>s)  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Restores message service settings from non-volatile memory to active  
memory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings. Settings  
specified in commands Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message  
Parameters +CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB  
(if implemented) are restored. Certain settings, such as SIM SMS  
parameters, cannot be restored.  
<profile>  
Description  
0..2  
Profile number where settings are to be stored. Default  
value is 0  
12.11 AT+ICF  
Cable Interface Character Format  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Defines DTE-DCE  
character framing  
AT+ICF=[format[,parity]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+ICF?  
• +ICF:  
<format>,<parity>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+ICF=?  
• +ICF: (list of  
supported  
<format>s), (list of  
supported <parity>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This extended-format compound parameter is used to determine the  
local serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing used by the  
DCE to accept DTE commands, and while transmitting information text  
and result code, if this is not automatically determined; (Not  
supported) +IPR=0 forces +ICF=0 (see +IPR).  
<format>  
Description  
3
8 Data 1 Stop. Default value  
202  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
12. INTERFACE  
<parity>  
Description  
3
Space. Default value  
Example  
AT+ICF?  
+ICF: 3,3  
OK  
12.12 AT+IFC  
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Defines DTE-DCE local  
flow control  
AT+IFC=[<by_te>,  
[<by_ta>]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+IFC?  
+IFC: <by_te>,<by_ta>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+IFC=?  
+IFC: (list of supported  
<by_te>s,<by_ta>s)  
Defines the flow control between the modem and the computer when in  
on-line data mode.  
No flow control is enabled in any of the command modes.  
<by_te>  
Description  
0
1
No flow control on DTE  
Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters are  
removed by the DCE interface  
2
3
RTS flow control on DCE. Default value  
Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters are  
passed to the remote DCE/DTE  
<by_ta>  
Description  
0
1
2
No flow control on DCE  
Xon/Xoff flow control on DTE  
CTS flow control on DCE. Default value  
203  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
12.13 AT+ILRR  
Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Defines DTE-DCE  
character framing  
AT+ILRR=<value>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+ILRR?  
+ILRR:<value>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+ILRR=?  
+ILRR:(list of supported  
<values>s)  
Specifies whether or not the extended-format “+ILRR:<rate>”  
information text is transmitted from the DCE to the DTE. The <rate>  
reported shall represent the current (negotiated or renegotiated) DTE-  
DCE rate. If enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted after  
any modulation, error control or data compression reports are  
transmitted, and before any final result code (e.g. CONNECT) is  
transmitted. The <rate> is applied after the final result code is  
transmitted.  
<value>  
Description  
0
Disables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is not  
transmitted). Default value  
1
Enables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is transmitted)  
12.14 AT+IPR  
Cable Interface Port Command  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Defines fixed DTE rate  
AT+IPR=[rate]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+IPR?  
• +IPR:<rate>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+IPR=?  
• +IPR: (), (list of fixed-  
only <rate>s)]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands, in  
addition to 1200bits/s or 9600bits/s (as required in v25ter, subclause  
4.3). It may be used to select operation at rates used by the DTE, which  
the DCE is not capable of automatically detecting.  
204  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
12. INTERFACE  
The specified rate takes effect following the issuance of any result  
code(s) associated with the current command line.  
<rate>  
Description  
Discrete  
integer value  
The <rate> value specified shall be the rate in bits per  
second at which the DTE-DCE interface should operate,  
e.g. “19200” or “115200”. The rates supported by a  
particular DCE are manufacturer specific.  
The following rates, are supported;  
1200  
2400  
4800  
9600  
19200  
38400  
57600  
115200  
230400  
460800  
12.15 AT*E2SPI Serial Peripheral Interface  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Serial Peripheral  
interface  
AT*E2SPI=<op>  
[,<byteformat>  
[,<InitSync>]]  
[,<byte1>,<byte2>,...,  
<byte n>]  
• ERROR  
• OK  
• *E2SPI:  
<byte1rx>,<byte2rx>,...,  
<bytenrx>  
OK  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*E2SPI?  
• *E2SPI: <active>,  
<byteformat>  
OK  
Shows if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2SPI=?  
• *E2SPI: (list of supported  
<op>s,list of supported  
<byteformat>s, list of  
supported <InitSync>s)  
• ERROR  
This command allows the user to send data via an SPI bus. The SPI bus  
is made up from the IO pins (IO1 = Clock, IO2 = Data In, IO3 = Data  
Out, and O6/ RI = Sync (optional)).  
The bus works with the GM47 being the SPI master. The clock is  
generated by the GM47, and on each clock cycle, data is both  
transmitted on the Data Out pin, and received on the Data in pin. The  
Sync pin (optional) can be used as a chipselect pin for latching the data  
after a number of bytes have been sent. The initial state of the Sync pin  
can be set, so it is toggled from that state.  
Once the SPI bus is enabled, the IOs that are used can not be used for  
any other purpose until the SPI is disabled. This means the AT*E2IO  
command cannot modify these pins, and if the Sync pin is activated, RI  
will not be output.  
Three operations can be made on the SPI bus:  
205  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
SPI Enable (<op> = 255)  
This command is entered to set up the SPI bus, and to enable the  
relevant signals. The byte format is defined here (the number of bytes  
output between toggling the Sync pin high and low). The Initial state of  
the Sync pin is also defined. If the byte format is set to zero (0), then the  
Sync pin is not used, and is not controlled by the SPI.  
Example:  
AT*E2SPI=255,2,1<CR>  
OK  
This command sets the SPI bus active, and the Sync pin is made toggle  
every 2 bytes of output data. The initial state of the Sync pin is HIGH.  
SPI Send/Receive (<op> = 1-32)  
This command sends from 1 - 32 bytes of data across the enabled SPI  
bus. Data is sent MSB first, from the first byte to the last byte.  
Example:  
AT*E2SPI=8,170,170,85,85,170,170,85,85<CR>  
OK  
This command sends 8 bytes (170,170,85,85,170,170,85,85) across the  
SPI bus. Bytes are in decimal format.  
SPI Disable (<op>= 0)  
This command is sent to disable the SPI functionality, and restore use  
of IO pins to other applications. The SPI bus must be disabled before  
being enabled with a new set of parameters.  
AT*E2SPI=0  
OK  
<op>  
Description  
0
Disable SPI bus  
1-32  
255  
Send/ receive 1-32 bytes  
Enable SPI bus  
<byteformat>  
Description  
0
No Sync Pin function  
1-32  
Sync is toggled every 1-32 bytes sent/received  
206  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
12. INTERFACE  
<InitSync>  
Description  
0
1
Sync Pin initial state LOW  
Sync Pin initial state HIGH  
<byte x>,  
Description  
<byte x rx>  
0-255  
decimal value denoting the byte value to be sent  
<active>  
Description  
0
1
SPI bus is active (pins are controlled by SPI)  
SPI bus is not active (pins are not controlled by SPI)  
12.16 AT*E2ESC M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Set GPRS online  
command guard time  
AT*E2ESC=[<gt>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*E2ESC?  
*E2ESC: <gt>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2ESC=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Defines a guard time for the escape sequence in GPRS to return to on-  
line command mode i.e. if +++AT<CR> is received either as part of the  
data stream or a terminating string from the application and no further  
data is received for the duration of the guard time the module will go  
into on line command mode. This guards against the module  
accidentally going into on line command mode. The verbose format of  
+++AT<CR> is <S2><S2><S2>AT<S3>.  
<gt>  
Description  
0
No guard time. Default value  
1-10  
Guard time in seconds  
207  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
208  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
13. Network  
13.1 AT*E2CD  
Ericsson M2M Cell Description  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request network cell  
description  
AT*E2CD=<n>  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*E2CD?  
• *E2CD:  
<n>,<lac>,<ci>,<ta>  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2CD=?  
• *E2CD: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• ERROR  
Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code E2CD: when  
<n>=1, or when there is a change in one of the network cell parameters,  
E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta>.  
Read command returns the status of result code presentation and several  
values, which show the network cell parameters.  
Location information <lac>, <ci> and <ta> are returned only when  
<n>=1 and the ME is registered in the network. To know if the ME is  
registered use the AT+CREG command. If the ME is not registered in  
the cellular network an ERROR message is returned.  
<n>  
Description  
0
Disable network location information unsolicited result  
code. Default value  
1
Enable network location information unsolicited result  
code *E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta>  
<lac>  
Description  
String type  
Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format  
<ci>  
Description  
string type  
Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format  
209  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
     
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<ta>  
Description  
0-63  
According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing  
advance value is the binary representation of the timing  
advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 ìs. <ta> is the  
integer representation of the timing advance in binary  
format  
64-255  
Reserved  
210  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
13. NETWORK  
13.2 AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set the  
AT*E2EMM= • ERROR  
response  
presentation  
mode  
<n>[,<m>]  
• OK  
Display mode  
neighbour cells  
are taken from  
the toplist  
*E2EMM:  
Serving Cell  
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch[,RxL,C1,  
C2][,RxLFull,RxLSub,RxQFull,RxQSub,TA,T  
N],  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>  
[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,  
<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>],  
NeighBours Cells  
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch,RxL[,C1,  
C2],  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
OK  
Compact mode.  
The first cell is the  
serving cell, the  
rest are  
neighbour cells  
taken from the  
toplist  
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,  
<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>][,<rxlSub>,<rxqsub>,  
<ta>],<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>,  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>,  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>  
OK  
Verbose mode.  
The first cell is the  
serving cell and  
the rest are  
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,  
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>]  
[,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,  
<ta>,<tn>],  
neighbour cells  
as provided by  
the network in  
the system info.  
messages (2 and  
5) and via the  
AT*E2NBTS  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
command  
OK  
Reduced display  
mode - info. as  
display mode but  
without text  
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,  
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>]  
[,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,  
<ta>,<tn>],  
headings or  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
<CR><LF>  
separators,  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
neighbour cells  
from top list  
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]  
OK  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*E2EMM? • *E2EMM: <n>  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2EMM= • *E2EMM: (list of supported <n>s),(list  
?
of supported <m>s)  
• ERROR  
211  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
There are four presentation format modes (Display, Compact, Verbose,  
and Reduced Display) and two response types (one shot response or  
continuous unsolicited responses).  
The purpose of the presentation format mode Display is to display the  
data in a readable form, including headers and line breaks  
(<CR><LF>). This format is, however, not well suited for machine  
decoding. The formats Verbose, Compact and Reduced Display do not  
have headers or line breaks. Verbose mode displays more parameters  
than the compact mode.  
The response types give the user the choice of one a shot information or  
an unsolicited response with <m> seconds between each response.  
Examples  
AT*E2EMM=1  
*E2EMM:  
Serving Cell  
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellId,BSIC,Ch,RxL,C1,C2  
234,15,0016,0D91,2E,0081,-085,00019,00019  
Neighbour Cells  
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellId,BSIC,Ch,RxL,C1,C2  
000,00,0016,4047,3A,0083,-103,00001,00001  
000,00,0016,423C,3A,0065,-104,00000,00000  
000,00,0016,2F21,21,0067,-104,00000,00000  
000,00,0016,8E3D,34,0077,-104,00000,00000  
000,00,0016,348A,10,0091,-104,00000,00000  
OK  
AT*E2EMM=3  
*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell ci>,  
<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>][,<servcell rxlSub>,  
<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>],<neighborcell1 mcc>,  
<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,  
<neighborcell1 ch>,<neighborcell1 rxl>,<neighborcell2 mcc>,  
<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,  
<neighborcell2 ch>,<neighborcell2 rxl>,  
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcellnci>,  
<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,<neighborcelln rxl>  
<CR><LF>  
OK  
AT*E2EMM=5  
*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,  
<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,  
<servcell C1>,<servcell C2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,  
<servcell rxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell tn>,<servcell ta>],  
212  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
13. NETWORK  
<neighborcell1 mcc>,<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,  
<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,  
<neighborcell1 rxl>[,<neighborcell1 C1>,<neighborcell1 C2>],  
<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,  
<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,  
<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 C1>,<neighborcell2 C2>],  
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcelln lac>,  
<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,  
<neighborcelln rxl>[,<neighborcelln C1>,<neighborcelln C2>]  
<CR><LF>  
OK  
AT*E2EMM=7  
*E2EMM:<servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,  
<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,  
<servcell c1>,<servcell c2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,  
<servcell rxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>,<servcell tn>],  
<neighborcell1 mcc>,< neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,  
<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,  
<neighborcell1 rxl>[,< neighborcell1 c1>,<neighborcell1 c2>],  
<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,  
<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,  
<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 c1>,<neighborcell2c2>]  
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcelln mnc>,<neighborcelln lac>,  
<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,  
<neighborcelln rxl>[,<neighborcelln c1>,<neighborcelln c2>]  
OK  
The mode setting <n> in the set command has the combination listed in  
the table below.  
When <n>=5, the shot information is the same as in <n>=1, but  
neighbouring cells, which have to be up to 16. This is the information  
that comes from the Serving Cell through the BCCH, reporting the BTS  
that are on the Serving Cell's surroundings.  
<n>  
Description  
0
Disable network monitoring unsolicited result code.  
Default value  
1
2
3
One shot presentation of the network location  
information. Display mode with headers and <CR><LF>  
line separators  
Enable network location information unsolicited result  
code in Display mode (like n=1). There will be continuous  
unsolicited information responses <m> seconds apart  
One shot presentation of the compact network location  
information  
213  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<n>  
Description  
4
Enable compact network location information unsolicited  
result code. There will be continuous unsolicited  
information responses <m> seconds apart  
5
One shot presentation of the network location information  
(verbose format), including 16 BTSs, coming from the  
Serving Cell signalling information  
6
7
As n=5 format but there will be continuous unsolicited  
information responses <m> seconds apart  
One shot presentation of the network information (same  
information as in n=1) but no headers or <CR><LF> line  
separators. Neighbor cells from the Toplist  
8
As n=7 format but there will be continuous unsolicited  
information responses <m> seconds apart  
<m>  
Description  
1-255  
Integer type giving time (in seconds) between unsolicited  
responses. Default value is 5  
<mcc>  
Description  
Integer type  
Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code  
identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU  
<mnc>  
Description  
Integer type  
Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code  
identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell  
<lac>  
Description  
Integer type  
Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format  
<ci>  
Description  
Integer type  
Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format  
<bsic>  
Description  
Integer type  
One byte Base Stations Identification code in  
hexadecimal format  
<ch>  
Description  
(0-1023)  
It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF  
Channel, which identifies the BCCH carrier  
214  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
13. NETWORK  
<rxl>  
Description  
Integer type  
Received Signal Strength level in dBm measured on idle  
mode  
<rxlfull>  
Description  
Integer type  
Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is  
taken in the Downlink and statistically is applied to 100  
TDMA frames of the TCH or during a SACCH multiframe  
<rxlsub>  
Description  
Integer type  
Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is  
taken from the DownLink signal and the average is  
applied to subset of SACCH frames  
<rxqfull>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BER < 0.1%  
0.26% < BER < 0.30%  
0.51% < BER < 0.64%  
1.0% < BER < 1.3%  
1.9% < BER < 2.7%  
3.8% < BER < 5.4%  
7.6% < BER < 11.0%  
BER > 15.0%  
<mcc>  
Description  
Integer type  
Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code  
identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU  
<rxqsub> is the parameter that indicates the quality in the received  
signal on dedicated mode. The measurement average is applied to a  
subset of a SACCH multiframe.  
<rxqsub>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
BER < 0.1%  
0.26% < BER < 0.30%  
0.51% < BER < 0.64%  
1.0% < BER < 1.3%  
215  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<rxqsub>  
Description  
4
5
6
7
1.9% < BER < 2.7%  
3.8% < BER < 5.4%  
7.6% < BER < 11.0%  
BER > 15.0%  
<c1>  
Description  
Integer  
Path Loss criterion parameter for neighbour cells. The MS  
calculates this parameter, in idle mode, to decide if the  
cell is suitable to camp on. After the calculation the  
criterion is C1 > 0. See GSM 05.08  
<c2>  
Description  
Integer  
Cell reselection parameter for neighbour cells. This  
parameter shall optimise the selected cell reselection  
<ta>  
Description  
0-63  
According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing  
advance value is the binary representation of the timing  
advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 ìs. <ta> is the  
integer representation of the timing advance in binary  
format  
64-255  
Reserved  
<tn>  
Description  
0-7  
Its value indicates the time slot number in a traffic channel  
216  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
13. NETWORK  
13.3 AT*E2SPN M2M Service Provider Indication  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request service  
provider indication  
AT*E2SPN  
• *E2SPN: <spi>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2SPN=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the MS to return the service provider name stored in the SIM  
card (<spi> parameter). The text will consist of a maximum of 16 bytes  
containing the service provider name stored in the EF  
file in the SIM  
SPN  
card (see GSM 11.11). ERROR is returned if the field is not present on  
the SIM.  
<spi>  
Description  
String  
String type field of maximum length 16 bytes; character  
set as specified by command Select TE character set  
+CSCS  
13.4 AT*EALS  
Ericsson Request ALS Status  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Requests current status  
for ALS  
AT*EALS  
• *EALS: <status>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EALS=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to request the MS to give ALS (Alternate Line Services) status.  
The information is available on the SIM card. If ALS is active, the user  
has two lines for voice calls. The line number or name tag for the line is  
then indicated on the display.  
<status>  
Description  
0
1
ALS function is not active (off)  
ALS function is active (on)  
217  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
13.5 AT*ECSP  
Ericsson Customer Service Profile  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read the customer  
service profile from the  
SIM  
AT*ECSP=<service  
group>  
• *ECSP: <service  
group>,<services>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ECSP=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command is used to read the customer service profile (CSP) from  
the SIM. CSP is a list on the SIM, which indicates the services that are  
user accessible. Each of the services has a related bit within the CSP.  
The services are grouped into service groups, with a maximum of 8  
services in a group. For each service group, a bit mask tells which  
services are available (bit=1). Unused bits are set to 0.  
<service  
group>  
Description  
Byte  
Each service group has a corresponding number, service  
group code  
<services>  
Description  
byte  
Bit mask (8 bits), indicating the services within the service  
group  
Bit=0: unused or unavailable service  
Bit=1: available service  
218  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
13. NETWORK  
13.6 AT*EPNR  
Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read entries in SIM  
preferred list  
AT*EPNR=<format>  
[,<index1>  
[,<index2]]  
• *EPNR:  
<index1>,<oper1>[...]  
*EPNR: <index2>,  
<oper2>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command is  
supported  
AT*EPNR=?  
• *EPNR: (list of  
supported <index>s),  
(list of supported  
<format>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command is used to read the SIM preferred list of networks  
(EF ).  
PLMNSEL  
<index1>  
Description  
integer  
Start index (>0)  
<index2>  
Description  
integer  
Stop index (>0)  
<format>  
Description  
2
Numeric <oper>  
<oper>  
Description  
string  
String indicates the code for the operator.  
E.g. GSM - Sweden - Europolitan: “24008” (3 + 2).  
PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network  
Example  
AT*EPNR=2,1,10  
*EPNR: 1,“24008”  
*EPNR: 2,“20404”  
*EPNR: 3,“20810”  
*EPNR: 4,“20205”  
*EPNR: 5,“65501”  
*EPNR: 6,“26203”  
*EPNR: 7,“50503”  
*EPNR: 8,“27201”  
*EPNR: 9,“64101”  
219  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
*EPNR: 10,“27801”  
OK  
13.7 AT*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Write/delete entries in  
SIM preferred list  
AT*EPNW=[<index>]  
[,<format>,<oper>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EPNW=?  
• *EPNW: (list of  
supported  
<index>s), (list of  
supported  
<format>)s  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command is used to edit the SIM preferred list of networks  
(EF ). The entry field <oper> contains mobile country code  
PLMNSEL  
(MCC) and mobile network code (MNC).  
<index>  
Description  
Integer  
Index to entry in SIM preferred list.  
The SIM preferred list contains at least 8 positions  
according to GSM 11.11  
<format>  
Description  
2
Numeric <oper>  
<oper>  
Description  
String  
String indicates the code for the operator.  
E.g. GSM – Sweden - Europolitan: “24008” (3 + 2).  
PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network  
220  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
13. NETWORK  
13.8 AT*E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request SIM Serial  
number  
AT*E2SSN?  
<SSN>  
Shows if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2SSN=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command requests the SIM serial number held in the ICCid field  
(address 2FE2) on the SIM and returns all valid characters to the TE.  
This field is detailed in GSM 11.11 section 10.1.1.  
<SSN>  
Description  
String without  
double quotes  
SIM serial number  
EXAMPLES  
AT*E2SSN?  
8944110063503224707  
OK  
where the raw data contained in the ICCid field on the SIM is  
984411003605234207F7.  
Test command:  
AT*E2SSN=?  
OK  
221  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
13.9 AT*ESLN  
Ericsson Set Line Name  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the line name tag  
in the MS  
AT*ESLN=<line>  
[,<name>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*ESLN?  
• *ESLN:  
<line1>,<name1><CR><LF>  
*ESLN: <line2>,<name2>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ESLN=?  
• *ESLN: (list of supported  
<line>s),<lname>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sets the name tag for a selected line.  
<line>  
Description  
0
This means that the two lines will use the default name  
tags, i.e. “L1” and “L2”. Default value  
1
2
Line 1  
Line 2  
<name>  
Description  
String  
Characters for name tag  
This parameter is optional when <line> is set to 0  
<lname>  
Description  
Integer  
Maximum number of characters to use in <name> string  
(20)  
222  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
13. NETWORK  
13.10 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read IMSI  
AT+CIMI  
• <IMSI>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CIMI=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Causes the TA to return <IMSI>, identifying the individual SIM  
attached to the ME.  
<IMSI>  
Description  
string without  
double quotes  
International Mobile Subscriber Identity  
Example  
AT+CIMI  
234157411545420  
OK  
13.11 AT+CLCK Facility Lock  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request facility lock  
AT+CLCK=<fac>,  
<mode>[,<passwd>  
[,<class>]]  
• when <mode>=2 and  
command successful:  
+CLCK:  
<status>[,<class1>  
[<CR><LF>+CLCK:  
<status>,<class2>[...]]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CLCK=?  
• +CLCK: (list of  
supported <fac>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
The command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate an ME or a network  
facility <fac>. A password is normally needed to carry out such actions.  
223  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Call barring facilities are based on GSM supplementary services (refer  
to GSM 02.88). The interaction of these, with other commands based on  
other GSM supplementary services, is described in the GSM standard.  
<fac>  
Description  
“PS”  
PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when  
other than current SIM card inserted)  
“SC”  
SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up  
and when this lock command issued)  
“FD”  
“P2”  
“AO”  
“OI”  
“AI”  
“IR”  
SIM fixed dialling feature. PIN2 is required as a password  
SIM PIN2  
BAOC (bar all outgoing calls)  
BOIC (bar outgoing international calls)  
BAIC (bar all incoming calls)  
BIC-Roam (bar incoming calls when roaming outside the  
home country)  
“OX”  
BOIC-exHC (bar outgoing international calls except to  
home country)  
“AB”  
“AG”  
“AC”  
“PN”  
“PU”  
“PP”  
“PC”  
All barring services  
All out going barring services  
All in coming barring services  
Network personalization  
Network subset personalization  
Service provider personalization  
Corporate personalization  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Unlock  
1
Lock  
2
Query status  
10  
Full lock (only valid for <fac>=“PS”, after power on always  
ask for password)  
<status>  
Description  
0
1
Not active  
Active  
224  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
13. NETWORK  
<passw>  
Description  
string type  
Is the same as password specified for the facility from the  
ME user interface or with change password command,  
+CPWD  
<classx>  
Description  
1
Voice L1  
2
Data  
4
Fax  
8
Short message service  
Data circuit sync  
Data circuit async  
Dedicated packet access  
Voice L2  
16  
32  
64  
128  
1..30  
When “no reply” is enabled or queried, this gives the time  
in seconds to wait before the call is forwarded. Default  
value is 20  
13.12 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request subscriber  
number  
AT+CNUM  
• +CNUM:  
[<alpha1>],<number1>,<type1>  
[,<speed>,<service>[,<itc>]][<CR>  
<LF>+CNUM:  
[<alpha2>],<number2>,<type2>  
[,<speed>,<service> [,<itc>]][…]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CNUM=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command returns the MSISDNs related to the subscriber (this  
information can be stored in the SIM or in the ME). If subscriber has  
different MSISDN for different services, each MSISDN is returned in a  
separate line.  
<alphax>  
Description  
Alphanumeric  
string  
Associated with <numberx>; used character set should be  
the one selected with the Select TE character set  
command, +CSCS  
225  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<numberx>  
Description  
String type  
Phone number of format specified by <typex>  
<typex>  
Description  
Integer format Type of address, (refer to GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7)  
<speed>  
Description  
data rate  
As defined in subclause 6.7 GSM 07.07  
<service>  
Description  
0
4
5
Asynchronous modem  
Voice  
Fax  
<itc>  
Description  
0
1
3.1kHz  
UDI  
13.13 AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request connected  
line identification  
presentation  
AT+COLP=[<n>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+COLP?  
• +COLP: <n>,<m>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+COLP=?  
• +COLP: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command refers to the GSM/UMTS supplementary service COLP  
(Connected Line Identification Presentation) that enables a calling  
subscriber to get the connected line identity (COL) of the called party  
after setting up a mobile originated call. The command enables or  
disables the presentation of the COL at the TE. It has no effect on the  
execution of the supplementary service COLR in the network.  
226  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
13. NETWORK  
When enabled (and allowed by the called subscriber), +COLP:  
<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]] intermediate  
result code is returned from the TA to the TE before any +CR or V.25ter  
responses. It is manufacturer specific if this response is used when  
normal voice call is established.  
Read command gives the status of <n>, and also triggers an  
interrogation of the provision status of the COLP service according  
3GPP TS 22.081 (given in <m>).  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
<n>  
Description  
0
1
Disable  
Enable  
<m>  
Description  
0
1
2
COLP not provisioned  
COLP provisioned  
unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)  
Intermediate Result codes:  
+COLP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]]  
227  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
13.14 AT+COPS Operator Selection  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request operator  
selection  
AT+COPS=[<mode> • +CME ERROR <err>  
[,<format>  
[,<oper>]]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+COPS?  
• +COPS:  
<mode>[,<format>,  
<oper>]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+COPS=?  
• +COPS: list of supported  
(<stat>,long  
alphanumeric <oper>,  
short alphanumeric  
<oper>,numeric  
<oper>)s  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Forces an attempt to select and register the GSM network operator.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
3
Automatic (<oper> field is ignored)  
Manual (<oper> field present)  
Set only <format> (for read command +COPS?), do not  
attempt registration/de-registration (<oper> field is  
ignored); this value is not applicable in read command  
response  
4
Manual/automatic (<oper> field present); if manual  
selection fails, automatic mode (<mode>=0) is entered  
<format>  
Description  
0
2
Automatic (<oper> field is ignored)  
Numeric <oper>  
<oper>  
Description  
string type  
Format determined by the <format> setting  
<stat>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Unknown  
Available  
Current  
Forbidden  
228  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
13. NETWORK  
Example  
AT+COPS=?  
+COPS: (2,“UK VODAFONE”,“UK Vodafone”,“23415”)  
+COPS: (3,“UK Orange PCS Ltd”,“Orange”,“23433”)  
+COPS: (3,“T-Mobile UK”,“T-Mobile UK”,“23430”)  
+COPS: (3,“O2 - UK”,“O2 - UK”,“23410”)  
OK  
13.15 AT+CREG Network Registration  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request network  
registration  
AT+CREG=[<n>]  
AT+CREG?  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
• +CREG: <n>,<stat>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CREG=?  
• +CREG: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code  
+CREG: <stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the ME network  
registration status.  
Read command returns the status of result code presentation and an  
integer <stat>, which shows whether the network has currently  
indicated the registration of the ME.  
Controls the presentation of the unsolicited result code +CREG.  
<n>  
Description  
0
Disable network registration unsolicited result code.  
Default value  
1
Enable network registration unsolicited result code  
229  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<stat>  
Description  
0
Not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new  
operator to register with  
1
2
Registered, home network  
Not registered, but ME is currently searching for a new  
operator to register with  
3
4
5
Registration denied  
Not detailed  
Registered, roaming  
Example  
AT+CREG?  
+CREG: 0,1  
OK  
13.16 AT*ECPI  
Ciphering Indicator  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request activation of  
the ciphering  
AT*ECPI=<switch>  
AT*ECPI?  
• OK  
• +CME: <error>  
• ERROR  
indication  
Shows the current  
setting  
• *ECPI: <switch>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ECPI=?  
• *ECPI: (list of supported  
<switch>es values)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command allows the external application to activate/deactivate the  
ciphering indication. The ciphering indication allows the external  
application to detect when the mobile connection becomes deciphered  
and thus unsecured.  
Test command gives the current value of the <switch> parameter,  
informing if the indicator is enabled or disabled.  
The ciphering indicator feature may be disabled by the home network  
operator setting data in the “administrative data” field (EFAD) in the  
SIM as defined in GSM 11.11.  
230  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
13. NETWORK  
If this feature is not disabled by the SIM, then whenever a connection is  
in place, which is or becomes deciphered, an indication is given via the  
unsolicited result code *ECPV:<ciphering>.  
<switch>  
Description  
1
Ciphering indication is on. The unsolicited result code  
*ECPV is sent anytime the communication is unsecured  
and when it becomes secure again  
0
Ciphering indication is off. Disable the ciphering  
indication, *ECPV is not sent  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*ECPV: <ciphering>. Sent only when <switch> is set to 0.  
Unsolicited Result Codes  
*ECPV - Ciphering Indicator  
SYNTAX - Unsolicited Result code  
Description  
Response  
When  
Set command informs  
the TE when a  
communication is  
unsecured due to the  
fact that the network  
is not enciphering the  
communication  
*ECPV: <ciphering>  
When AT*ECPI enables it,  
the *ECPV:<ciphering> is  
sent during a connection  
whenever the  
communication is not  
enciphered. If a  
connection becomes  
secure after that, the  
*ECPV:<ciphering> is sent  
again to indicate that now  
the communication is  
enciphered  
<ciphering>  
Description  
0
The connection is secured. The network enciphers the  
communication  
1
The connection is unsecured. The network does not  
encipher the communication  
231  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
13.17 AT*E2NBTS Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Neighbour  
AT*E2NBTS=<ch1>,<bsic1>[,<ch2  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Cells to monitor >,<bsic2>[,<ch3>,<bsic3>[,<ch4  
>,<bsic4>[,<ch5>,<bsic5>[,<ch6  
>,<bsic6>[,<ch7>,<bsic7>[,<ch8  
>,<bsic8>[,<ch9>,<bsic9>[,<ch1  
0>,<bsic10>[,<ch11>,<bsic11>[,<  
ch12>,<bsic12>[,<ch13>,<bsic13  
>[,<ch14>,<bsic14>[,<ch15>,<bsi  
c15>[,<ch16>,<bsic16>]]]]]]]]]]]]]  
]]  
Show the  
current setting  
AT*E2NBTS?  
• *E2NBTS:  
<mcc>,<mnc>,  
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl><CR><LF>  
<mcc>,<mnc>,  
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl><CR><LF>  
<mcc>,<mnc>,  
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,  
<rxl><CR><LF>  
<CR><LF>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2NBTS=?  
• *E2NBTS: (list of  
supported <ch>s)  
• ERROR  
The set command shall provide with the ARFCNs (<ch>) and the BSIC  
(the BSIC is a cell colour code) to the MS in order to monitor those  
channels, belonging to the neighbour cells, instead of the ones that come  
through the air interface, in the serving cell information broadcast  
channel.  
It is possible to update that information with up to 16 neighbour cells.  
If less than 16 <ch>s are provided, then the assigned channels shall  
substitute the last previous channel (given either by the BCCH or by  
another AT*E2NBTS command), if it is not in the list yet. Therefore,  
<ch1>,<bsic1> will substitute BTS 16 in the MS, <ch2>,<bsic2> to the  
BTS 15 and so on. If any of the <ch>s is already in the top-list, then it  
is skipped.  
The read command displays the data of every neighbour cell, including  
the following parameters: MCC, MNC, Cell ID, BSIC, Channel and Rx  
Level.  
<ch>  
Description  
(0-1023)  
It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF  
Channel, which identifies a BCCH carrier  
232  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
13. NETWORK  
<mcc>  
Description  
String Type  
Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code  
identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU  
<mnc>  
Description  
String Type  
Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code  
identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell  
<ci>  
Description  
String type  
Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format  
<bsic>  
Description  
String Type  
One byte Base Stations Identification code in  
hexadecimal format  
<rxl>  
Description  
String Type  
Received Signal Strength level in dBm, measured in idle  
mode  
233  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
234  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
14. Phonebook  
14.1 AT*E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request phone book  
checksum  
AT*E2PBCS  
• *E2PBCS: <cks>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2PBCS=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Command causes the ME to return the phone book checksum <cks>  
stored internally . Phone book checksum is recalculated whenever there  
is a change in the phone book. By requesting the checksum, the external  
application can detect if the phone book in the ME has changed, without  
downloading the whole phone book.  
During the SIM initialisation process, it takes some time to download  
the phone book from the SIM card to the ME, depending on the number  
of entries. In case the command is invoked before the checksum has  
been calculated, the ME gives an ERROR message.  
<cks>  
Description  
Hex type  
1 byte in hexadecimal (between “”), containing the  
checksum  
14.2 AT*ESAG  
Ericsson Add to Group  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Adds a new item to the  
group with <gindex>  
AT*ESAG=<gindex>,  
<type>,  
<itemindex>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ESAG=?  
• *ESAG: (list of  
supported  
<gindex>s, list of  
supported <type>s  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command adds a contact or a phone number to the current group.  
235  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
         
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<gindex>  
Description  
1-10  
The group index within the hierarchical phone book  
<type>  
Description  
1
2
Contact  
Phone number  
<itemindex>  
Description  
Integer  
The index of the contact/group/phone number to add.  
The <itemindex> parameter has the following meaning: if  
the item to add is a contact, the <itemindex> is the index  
of the contact in the contacts book. If the item to add is a  
phone number the <itemindex> is the index in the phone  
book  
14.3 AT*ESCG  
Ericsson Create Group  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Adds a new group to  
the hierarchical phone  
book  
AT*ESCG=<name>  
AT*ESCG=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows if the command  
is supported  
• *ESCG:  
<maxnamelength>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command creates a new group in the hierarchical phone book. The  
group is stored at the first available position. There are 10 group  
positions in the hierarchical phone book.  
<name>  
Description  
String  
The group name. Character set as specified by  
command Select TE Character Set (AT+CSCS)  
<maxnamelength>  
Description  
integer  
The maximum length of the grouping (bytes)  
236  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
14. PHONEBOOK  
14.4 AT*ESCN  
Ericsson Set Credit Card Number  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set up a credit  
card number  
AT*ESCN=<mode>  
[,<passwd>][,<indexn>]  
[,<asn>,<type>,<name>,  
<vercode>[,<send  
order>]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
when mode=3:*ESCN:  
<indexn>,<asn>,<type>,  
<name>,<vercode>,  
<send order>  
When mode=4:*ESCN:  
<selindexn>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*ESCN=?  
• *ESCN: (list of supported  
<index>s),(list of  
supported <mode>s),(list  
of supported <send  
order>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Command is used to:  
• set up a credit card number in the ME.  
• disable credit card calls.  
• enable one of the credit card call services.  
• query the settings for one of the services.  
• query the active credit call access server.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Settings for a credit card call (<passwd>, <indexn>,  
<asn>,<type>,<name>,<vercode> [,<send order>]). The  
four (4) parameters (<passwd>, <indexn>, <asn>,  
<vercode>) are mandatory when <mode>=0. If all those  
are not submitted ERROR will be returned  
1
2
Disable credit card calling (<passwd>). If any other  
parameters are submitted, they are ignored  
Enable one of the credit card call services (<passwd>,  
<indexn>). If any other parameters are submitted, they  
are ignored  
3
4
Query (<passwd>, <indexn>). If any other parameters are  
submitted, they are ignored  
Query for the selected credit call access server. If any  
parameters are submitted, they are ignored  
<passwd>  
Description  
String  
character string, phone lock code “PS”, PH-SIM  
237  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<indexn>  
Description  
1
2
Index number to the first credit card call access server  
Index number to the second credit card call access server  
<selindexn>  
Description  
0
1
2
Credit card calling disabled  
Index number to the first credit card call access server  
Index number to the second credit card call access server  
<asn>  
Description  
String  
Character string <0..9,+>, max. 20 characters Phone  
number of format specified by <typex>  
<type>  
Description  
Integer format Type of address  
<name>  
Description  
String  
Character string of the name tag, for M&M. Maximum of  
18 characters  
<vercode>  
Description  
String  
Character string <0..9,#,*>. Maximum of 20 characters  
<send order>  
Description  
1
2
Verification code first. Default value  
phone number to call first  
238  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
14. PHONEBOOK  
14.5 AT*ESDG  
Ericsson Delete Group  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Deletes a group  
defined in the  
hierarchical phone  
book  
AT*ESDG=<gindex>  
AT*ESDG=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
Show if the command  
is supported  
• *ESDG: list of  
<gindex>s  
• OK  
This command deletes the group at position <gindex> from the  
hierarchical phone book.  
<gindex>  
Description  
1-10  
The group index  
14.6 AT*ESDI  
Ericsson Delete Group Item  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Deletes the item in  
group <gindex> with  
position <index>  
AT*ESDI=<gindex>,<ind  
ex>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ESDI=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The command deletes the item with <index> in the group with  
<gindex>.  
<gindex>  
Description  
1-10  
The groups index within the hierarchical phone book  
<index>  
Description  
1-15  
The items index within the group  
239  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
14.7 AT*ESGR  
Ericsson Group Read  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Lists the groups defined  
in the hierarchical  
phone book  
AT*ESGR  
• *ESGR: <gindex1>,  
<name1>[<CR><LF>  
<gindex2>,  
<name2>..]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Shows if the command  
is supported  
AT*ESGR=?  
OK  
This command lists the groups in the hierarchical phone book.  
<gindex>  
Description  
1-10  
The group index  
<name>  
Description  
String  
The group name  
14.8 AT*EGIR  
Ericsson Group Item Read  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Lists the items in the  
<gindex> group  
AT*EGIR=<gindex>  
• *EGIR: <index1>,  
<type1>,<itemindex>  
[<CF><LF><index2>,  
<type2>, <itemindex>  
[...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EGIR=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command lists the items stored in the group identified by  
<gindex>.  
<gindex>  
Description  
1-10  
The groups index within the hierarchical phonebook  
<index>  
Description  
1-15  
The items index within the group  
<type>  
Description  
Integer  
The kind of item. See AT*ESAG <item> table for definition  
240  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
14. PHONEBOOK  
<itemindex>  
Description  
Integer  
The item's index within the phonebook/contacts/group  
14.9 AT*ESIL  
Ericsson Silence Command  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the MS to silent  
mode  
AT*ESIL=[<mode>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*ESIL?  
• *ESIL: <mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ESIL=?  
• *ESIL: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command orders the phone to be in silent mode. When the phone  
is in silent mode, all sounds from the MS are prevented.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
Silent mode off. Default value  
Silent mode on  
241  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
14.10 AT*ESNU Ericsson Settings Number  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets a number in the  
MS  
AT*ESNU=<type>,  
<number>[,<number  
type>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*ESNU?  
• *ESNU: <type 1>,  
<number 1>,  
<number type 1>  
<CR><LF> ….*ESNU:  
<type n>,  
<number n>,  
<number type n>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ESNU=?  
• *ESNU: (list of  
supported <type>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command sets a <type> number, in the format <number type>, in  
the MS.  
<type>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Voice L1  
Voice L2  
Fax  
Data  
<number type>  
Description  
129  
Default value when dialling string does not include the  
international access code character ‘+’  
145  
Default value when dialling string includes the  
international access code character ‘+’  
<number>  
Description  
0-9, +  
Number  
242  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
14. PHONEBOOK  
14.11 AT+CPBF Phonebook Find  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Show the current  
setting  
+CPBF=<findtext>  
• +CPBF:  
<index1>,<number>,<type>,  
<text>[[...]<CR><LF>+CBPF:  
<index2>,<number>,<type>,  
<text>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
+CPBF=?  
• +CPBF: <nlength>,<tlength>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns phone book entries whose alphanumeric field starts with  
<findtext>. Only currently selected source will be searched for,  
<findtext>  
Description  
string type  
Field of maximum length <tlength>; character set as  
specified by the select TE character set command, +CSCS  
14.12 AT+CPBR Phonebook Read  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read phone  
book entries  
+CPBR=<index1>  
[,<index2>]  
• +CPBR:<index1>,<number>,  
<type>,<text>[[,<text_date>,  
<text_time>]<CR><LF>+CPBR:  
<index2>,<number>,<type>,  
<text>[,<text_date>,  
<text_time>]]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
+CPBR=?  
• +CPBR: (list of supported  
<index>s),<nlength>,<tlength>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns phone book entries in location number range <index1>...  
<index2> from the current phone book memory storage selected with  
+CPBS. If <index2> is left out, only location <index1> is returned.  
Entry fields returned are location number <indexn>, phone number  
stored there <number> (of format <type>) and text <text> associated  
with the number.  
<indexn>  
Description  
integer type  
Values in the range of location numbers of phone book  
memory  
243  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<number>  
Description  
string type  
Phone number of format <type>  
<type>  
Description  
129  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international  
unknown  
145  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7  
161  
128 - 255  
<text>  
Description  
string type  
Field of maximum length <tlength>;  
character set as specified by the select TE character set  
command, +CSCS.  
<nlength>  
Description  
integer type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>  
<tlength>  
Description  
integer type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>  
Example  
AT+CPBR=1,99  
+CPBR: 1,“44123456789”,145,“Test Number”  
+CPBR: 2,“440987654321”,145,“Test number 2”  
+CPBR: 3,“449876543210”,129,“Test Number 3”  
OK  
244  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
14. PHONEBOOK  
14.13 AT+CPBS Phone Storage  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set phone book  
storage  
AT+CPBS=<storage>  
[,<password>]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CPBS?  
• +CPBS: <storage>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CPBS=?  
• +CPBS: (list of  
supported  
<storage>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects phone book memory storage <storage>, which is used by other  
phone book commands. Read command returns currently selected  
memory, and when supported by manufacturer, number of used  
locations and total number of locations in the memory.  
<storage>  
Description  
“FD”  
“EN”  
“ME”  
“SM”  
“DC”  
“RC”  
“MC”  
Fixed dialled numbers  
Emergency numbers  
ME phone book  
SIM phone book  
ME dialled calls list (30 entries)  
ME received calls list (30 entries)  
ME missed calls list (30 entries)  
<passwd>  
Description  
String type  
Represents the password required when selecting  
password protected <storage>s, for example PIN2 for  
storage “ME”  
245  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
14.14 AT+CPBW Phonebook Write  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request phone book  
write  
AT+CPBW=[<index>]  
[, <number>[,<type>  
[,<text>]]]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CPBW=?  
• +CPBW: (list of  
supported  
<index>s),<nlength>  
,(list of supported  
<type>s),<tlength>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Writes phone book entry in location number <index> in the current  
phone book memory storage area, selected with AT+CPBS. If the  
<number> and <text> parameters are omitted, the entry is deleted. If  
<index> is omitted but <number> is included, the entry is written to the  
first free location in the phone book.  
<index>  
Description  
integer type  
Values in the range of location numbers of phone book  
memory  
<number>  
Description  
string type  
Phone number of format <type>  
<type>  
Description  
integer format Type of address octet, default 145 when dialing string  
includes international access code character "+",  
otherwise 129. (refer to GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7)  
129  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international  
unknown  
145  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7  
161  
128-255  
<text>  
Description  
string type  
Field of maximum length <tlength>;  
character set as specified by the select TE character set  
command, +CSCS  
<nlength>  
Description  
integer type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>  
246  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
14. PHONEBOOK  
<tlength>  
Description  
integer type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>  
Example  
AT+CPBW=1,“44123456789”,145,“Test Number”  
OK  
AT+CPBW=2,“440987654321”,145,“Test number 2”  
OK  
AT+CPBW=3,“449876543210”,129,“Test Number 3”  
OK  
14.15 AT*ECAW Ericsson Callers Allowed Write  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Write to or remove  
from CA list  
AT*ECAW=[<CAindex>] • +CME ERROR <err>  
,[<groupname>][,[<stor  
age>],[<PBindex>][,<CL  
UID>]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*ECAW=?  
• *ECAW: (list of supported  
<CAindex>s),<gn_length  
>,(list of supported  
<storage>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Command is used for writing entries to and removing entries from the  
Callers Allowed (CA) list.  
If only <CAindex> is given, the entry at position <CAindex> will be  
deleted.  
If only <groupname> is given, a reference (group name) to a group is  
added to the CA list.  
If only <storage> and <PBindex> are given, a reference (PB index) to a  
phonebook entry is added to the Callers Allowed (CA) list.  
If only <CLUID> is given, a reference (CLUID) to the unique identifier  
to a contact is added to the CA list.  
Supplying <CAindex> and any of the following parameters will result  
in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err>.  
If writing fails in an ME, error +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.  
247  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Test command returns location range supported by the CA list and the  
supported storages.  
<CAindex>  
Description  
Integer type  
Values in the range of location numbers of CA list  
<groupname> Description  
String format  
Name of callers allowed group  
<storage>  
Description  
ME  
ME phonebook  
<PBindex>  
Description  
Integer type  
Values in the range of location numbers of phonebook  
memory  
<CLUID>  
Description  
Integer format LUID for contact  
14.16 AT*ECAR Ericsson Callers Allowed Read  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
List calls allowed  
AT*ECAR=  
<Caindex1>  
[,<Caindex2>]  
• *ECAR:<CAindex>,[<groupname>][,  
[<storage>],[<PBindex>][,CLUID]]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*ECAR=?  
• *ECAR: (list of supported  
<CAindex>s),<gn_length>,(list of  
supported <storage>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command returns entries in the Callers Allowed list. The list  
consists of a mix of phonebook entries, contacts and groups. The  
response consists of list index <CAindex> and one of the following  
types: <groupname>, phonebook storage <storage> plus phonebook  
index <PBindex>, or unique identifier to a contact <CLUID>. If  
<CAindex2> is supplied, all list items from <CAindex1> to  
<CAindex2> will be returned.  
248  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
14. PHONEBOOK  
If listing fails in a ME +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<CAindexn>  
Description  
Integer format Start value of location number  
<groupname> Description  
String format  
Name of callers allowed group  
<CLUID>  
Description  
Integer format LUID for contact  
Refer to the AT*ECAW command for the <storage> and <PBindex>  
parameters.  
249  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
250  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
15. Short Message Services - Point to Point  
15.1 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control  
15.2 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages  
15.3 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage  
Common for both PDU (Protocol Data Unit) and Text Modes  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set preferred  
message storage  
AT+CPMS=<mem1>  
[,<mem2>]  
[,<mem3>]  
• +CPMS:  
<used1>,<total1>,<used2>,  
<total2>,<used3>,<total3>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CPMS?  
• +CPMS:  
<mem1>,<used1>,<total1,  
<mem2>,<used2>,<total2,  
<mem3>,<used3>,<total3>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CPMS=?  
• +CPMS: (list of supported  
<mem1>s),(list of  
supported <mem2>s),(list  
of supported <mem3>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects memory storage <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> to be used for  
reading, writing, etc. If chosen storage is not appropriate for the ME  
(but is supported by the TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is  
returned.  
251  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
         
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Test command returns lists of memory storage supported by the TA.  
<mem1>  
Description  
string type  
Memory from which messages are read and deleted  
(commands List Messages +CMGL, Read Message  
+CMGR and Delete Message +CMGD)  
“ME”  
“SM”  
ME message storage  
SIM message storage. Default value  
<mem2>  
Description  
string type  
Memory to which writing and sending operations are  
made (commands Send Message from Storage +CMSS  
and Write Message to Memory +CMGW)  
“ME”  
“SM”  
ME message storage  
SIM message storage  
<mem3>  
Description  
string type  
Memory to which received SMs are preferred to be stored  
(unless forwarded directly to TE). Received CBMs are  
always stored in “BM” (or some manufacturer specific  
storage) unless directly forwarded to TE  
“ME”  
“SM”  
ME message storage  
SIM message storage  
<used1>,<used2>,<used3> Description  
integer type  
Total number of messages currently in  
<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively  
<total1>,<total2> ,<total3> Description  
integer type  
Total number of message locations in  
<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively  
Examples  
AT+CPMS=?  
+CPMS: (“ME”,“SM”),(“ME”,“SM”),(“ME”,“SM”)  
OK  
AT+CPMS?  
+CPMS: “ME”,0,40,“SM”,1,15,“ME”,0,40  
OK  
252  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
AT+CPMS=“sm”,“sm”,“sm”  
+CPMS: 1,15,1,15,1,15  
OK  
15.4 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address  
Common for both PDU and Text Modes  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set service centre  
address  
AT+CSCA=<sca>  
[,<tosca>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CSCA?  
• +CSCA:  
<sca>,<tosca>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CSCA=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Updates the SMSC address, through which mobile originated SMs are  
transmitted. In text mode, the setting is used by send (+CMGS) and  
write (+CMGW) commands. In PDU mode, the setting is used by the  
same commands, but only when the length of the SMSC address coded  
into <pdu> parameter equals zero. Note that a “+” in front of the number  
in <sca> has precedence over the <tosca> parameter, so that a number  
starting with “+” will always be treated as an international number.  
<sca>  
Description  
string type  
GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address Address-Value  
field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default  
alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the  
currently selected TE character set  
<tosca>  
Description  
integer type  
GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address type-of-address  
octet in integer format  
129  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international  
unknown  
145  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7  
161  
128-255  
253  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Example  
AT+CSCA?  
+CSCA: “44385016005”,145  
OK  
15.5 AT+CMGF Message Format  
Common for both PDU and Text Modes  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set message format  
AT+CMGF=<mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CMGF?  
• +CMGF: <mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMGF=?  
• +CMGF: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command tells the TA, which input and output format to use for  
messages. The <mode> parameter indicates the format of messages  
used with send, list, read and write commands, and unsolicited result  
codes resulting from received messages. Mode can be either PDU mode  
(entire TP data units used) or text mode (headers and body of the  
messages given as separate parameters).  
Test command returns supported modes as a compound value.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
PDU mode  
Text mode  
254  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
15.6 AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory  
PDU Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Write message to  
memory  
AT+CMGW=<length>  
[,<stat>]<CR>  
PDU is given<ctrl-Z/ESC>  
• +CMGW: <index>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMGW=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Stores a message to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location  
<index> of the stored message is returned. By default message status  
will be set to ‘stored unsent’, but parameter <stat> allows other status  
values to be given. ME/TA manufacturer may choose to use different  
default <stat> values for different message types. Entering PDU is the  
same as specified by the send message command, +CMGS. If writing  
fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See  
<stat>  
Description  
2
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
<pdu>  
Description  
...  
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by  
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts  
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long  
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is  
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))  
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format  
255  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Write message to  
memory  
AT+CMGW [=<oa/da>  
[,<tooa/toda>[,<stat>]]]  
<CR>  
Text is entered <ctrl-Z/  
ESC>  
• +CMGW: <index>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMGW=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Stores message (either SMS-DELIVER or SMS-SUBMIT) to memory  
storage <mem2>. Memory location <index> of the stored message is  
returned. By default message status will be set to ‘stored unsent’, but  
parameter <stat> allows also other status values to be given. The  
entering of text is done as specified in the send message command,  
+CMGS. If writing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is  
returned.  
Note!  
SMS-COMMANDs and SMS-STATUS-REPORTs cannot be stored in  
text mode.  
<stat>  
Description  
2
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)  
<oa>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <tooa>  
<da>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <toda>  
<tooa>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (default refer <toda>)  
<toda>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)  
default is 145, otherwise default is 129  
256  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
15.7 AT+CMGS Send Message  
PDU Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send message  
AT+CMGS=<length>  
<CR>  
PDU is given<ctrl-Z/  
ESC>  
• +CMGS:  
<mr>[,<ackpdu>]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMGS=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message  
reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message  
delivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is  
network support, <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identify  
message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending  
fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR:  
<err> is returned. This command is abortable.  
• <length> must indicate the number of octets coded in the TP layer  
data unit to be given (i.e. SMSC address octets are excluded).  
• The TA shall send a four character sequence  
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after  
command line is terminated with <CR>; after that PDU can be given  
from TE to ME/TA.  
• The DCD signal is in the ON state as PDU is given.  
• The echoing of given characters back from the TA is controlled by  
V.25ter echo command E.  
• The PDU shall be hexadecimal format (similarly as specified for  
<pdu>) and given in one line; ME/TA converts this coding into the  
actual octets of PDU.  
• When the length octet of the SMSC address (given in the <pdu>)  
equals zero, the SMSC address set with command Service Centre  
Address +CSCA is used.  
• Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).  
• <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of PDU.  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format  
257  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
<ackpdu>  
Description  
...  
GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is  
same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11  
SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by  
double quote characters like a normal string type  
parameter  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send message  
AT+CMGS=<da>  
[,<toda>] <CR>  
Text is entered<ctrl-Z/  
ESC>  
• +CMGS:  
<mr>[,<scts>]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMGS=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message  
reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message  
delivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is  
network support, <scts> is returned. Values can be used to identify  
message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending  
fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR:  
<err> is returned. This command is abortable.  
• The entered text (GSM 03.40 TP-Data-Unit) is sent to address <da>  
and all current settings (refer Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP and  
Service Centre Address +CSCA) are used to construct the actual  
PDU in the ME/TA.  
• The TA shall send a four character sequence  
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after the  
command line is terminated with <CR>; after that text can be  
entered from the TE to the ME/TA.  
• The DCD signal is in the ON state as text is entered.  
• The echoing of entered characters back from the TA is controlled by  
V.25ter echo command E.  
• The entered text should be formatted as follows:  
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default  
alphabet is used and <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-  
Data-Header-Indication is not set:  
258  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
if TE character set other than “HEX” (refer command Select  
TE Character Set +CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the  
entered text into GSM alphabet according to rules of Annex  
A; backspace can be used to delete last character and  
carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four  
character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every  
carriage return entered by the user);  
if TE character set is “HEX”: the entered text should consist  
of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which  
ME/TA converts to 7-bit characters of GSM alphabet (e.g.  
17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to character Π (GSM  
23));  
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used  
or <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-  
Indication is set: the entered text should consist of two IRA  
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts into  
8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be  
converted to an octet with integer value 42).  
• Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).  
• <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the  
message body.  
<da>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <toda>  
<toda>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)  
default is 145, otherwise default is 129  
<mr>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string  
format (refer <dt>)  
<scts>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference  
259  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Example  
AT+CMGF=1  
OK  
AT+CSDH=1  
OK  
AT+CSMP=17,167,0,0  
OK  
AT+CMGS=“+447747008670”  
> Test SMS  
+CMGS: 15  
OK  
15.8 AT+CMSS Send From Storage  
PDU mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send from storage  
AT+CMSS=<index>  
• +CMSS: <mr>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMSS=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends message with location value <index> from message storage  
<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND).  
Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message  
delivery. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code  
+CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is abortable. See  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format  
260  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send from storage  
AT+CMSS=<index>  
[,<da> [,<toda>]]  
• +CMSS: <mr> [,<scts>]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMSS=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends message with location value <index> from message storage  
<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND).  
Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message  
delivery. Optionally, when +CSMS <service> value is 1 and network  
supports, <scts> is returned. If sending fails in a network or an ME  
error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This  
command is abortable.  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
<da>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <toda>  
<toda>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)  
default is 145, otherwise default is 129  
<scts>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string  
format (refer <dt>)  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format  
261  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
15.9 AT+CMGC  
Send Command  
PDU Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send command  
message  
AT+CMGC=<length><CR>  
<pdu><ctrl-Z/ESC>  
• if PDU mode  
(+CMGF=0) and  
sending successful:  
+CMGC:  
<mr>[,<ackpdu>]  
• if sending fails:  
+CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMGC=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-  
COMMAND). The entering of PDU is as specified in the send message  
command, +CMGS. Message reference value <mr> is returned to the  
TE on successful message delivery. Optionally (when +CSMS  
<service> value is 1 and network supports) <ackpdu> is returned.  
Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status  
report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final  
result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is  
abortable.  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
<pdu>  
Description  
String  
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by  
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts  
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long  
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is  
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))  
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format  
<ackpdu>  
Description  
String  
GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is  
same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11  
SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by  
double quote characters like a normal string type  
parameter  
262  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send command  
message  
AT+CMGC=<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>  
[,<mn>[,<da>[,<toda>]]]]  
<CR>  
• if PDU mode  
(+CMGF=1) and  
sending successful:  
+CMGC:  
Text is entered<ctrl-Z/ESC>  
<mr>[,<scts>]  
• if sending fails:  
+CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
commands is  
supported  
AT+CMGC=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-  
COMMAND). The entering of text is as specified in the send message  
command, +CMGS, but the format is fixed to be a sequence of two IRA  
character long hexadecimal numbers, which the ME/TA converts into  
8-bit octets (refer to +CMGS). Message reference value <mr> is  
returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally, when  
+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network support, <scts> is  
returned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited  
delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME  
error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This  
command is abortable.  
<fo>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format  
First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format  
First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format  
First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format  
<ct>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type. Default value is 0  
<pid>  
Description  
0-255  
Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,  
according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9  
<mn>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Number  
263  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<da>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <toda>  
<toda>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)  
default is 145, otherwise default is 129  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format  
<scts>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string  
format (refer to <dt>)  
15.10 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE  
PDU Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set new message  
indication to TE  
AT+CNMI=[<mode>  
[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>  
]]]]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CNMI?  
• +CNMI:  
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CNMI=?  
• +CNMI:  
(list of supported <mode>s),  
(list of supported <mt>s),  
(list of supported <bm>s),  
(list of supported <ds>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from  
the network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal  
is ON. If the TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is  
carried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038).  
264  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or  
network, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<mode>  
Description  
3
Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE  
link specific inband technique used to embed result  
codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode  
<mt>  
Description  
0
No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.  
No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> as  
preferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in the  
SIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an error  
message accordingly to GSM 03.38  
1
2
SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of the  
memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result  
code:  
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>  
Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed  
directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code but not  
stored in ME/TA:  
+CMT:[<alpha >], <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode  
enabled)  
Class 2 data coding scheme result in indication as defined  
in <mt>=1  
3
Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using  
unsolicited result codes +CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>.  
Class 3 SMS-DELIVER is not stored in ME/TA. Messages of  
other data coding schemes result in indication as defined  
in <mt>=1  
<bm>  
Description  
0
Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specific  
memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE  
2
New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited  
result code:  
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled).  
New CBMs are not stored in CBM memory  
<ds>  
Description  
0
No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE. SMS-STATUS-  
REPORT is stored in ME/TA  
1
2
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited  
result code: +CDS: < length>< CR>< LF>< pdu> (PDU  
mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA  
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited  
result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (PDU mode enabled).  
SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA  
Unsolicited Result codes:  
265  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
+CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>  
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>  
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu>  
+CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu>  
+CDSI: <mem><index>  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set new message  
indication to TE  
AT+CNMI=[<mode>  
[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>  
]]]]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CNMI?  
• +CNMI:  
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CNMI=?  
• +CNMI:  
(list of supported <mode>s),  
(list of supported <mt>s),  
(list of supported <bm>s),  
(list of supported <ds>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from  
the network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal  
is ON. If TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is  
carried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038).  
If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or  
network, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<mode>  
Description  
3
Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE  
link specific inband technique used to embed result  
codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode  
266  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<mt>  
Description  
0
No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.  
No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> as  
preferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in the  
SIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an error  
message accordingly to GSM 03.38  
1
2
SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of the  
memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result  
code:  
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>  
Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed  
directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code:  
+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [ ,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,  
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data> (text mode  
enabled). About parameters in italics, refer to the show  
text mode command, +CSDH  
3
Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using  
unsolicited result codes +CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [  
,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR>  
<LF><data> (Text Mode enabled). About parameters in  
italics, refer to the show text mode command, +CSDH.  
Messages of other data coding schemes result in  
indication as defined in <mt>=1  
<bm>  
Description  
0
Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specific  
memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE  
2
New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited  
result code:  
+CBM:  
<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>  
(Text mode enabled)  
<ds>  
Description  
0
1
No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE  
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited  
result code: : +CDS:  
<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (Text mode  
enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA  
2
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited  
result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (Text mode enabled).  
SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA  
Unsolicited Result codes:  
+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts>  
[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF>  
<data> (Text Mode enabled). Refer to the show text mode command,  
+CSDH for information on the parameters in italics.  
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>  
+CBM: <sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>  
+CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>  
+CDSI: <mem><index>  
267  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Example  
Display cell broadcast messages:  
AT+CNMI=3,0,2,0,0  
15.11 AT+CMGR Read Message  
PDU Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read  
message  
AT+CMGR=  
<index>  
+CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length>]  
<CR><LF><pdu>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMGR=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns message with location value <index> from preferred message  
storage <mem1> to the TE. Status of the message and entire message  
data unit <pdu> is returned. If status of the message is ‘received  
unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received read’. If reading fails,  
final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<stat>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Received unread message (i.e. new message)  
Received read message  
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)  
Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
<alpha>  
Description  
String type  
Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not  
omitted  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
268  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<pdu>  
Description  
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by  
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts  
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long  
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is  
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))  
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format  
Note!  
It is possible to send SMS in PDU mode, if help for this is required then  
please contact customer support.  
269  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Read  
message  
AT+CMGR=  
[<index>]  
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-DELIVER:  
+CMGR:  
<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>,[<tooa>,  
<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,  
<length>]<CR><LF><data>  
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-SUBMIT:  
+CMGR:  
<stat>,<da>,[<alpha>],[<toda>,<fo>,  
<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],<sca>,<tosca>,  
<length>]<CR><LF><data>  
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-STATUS-REPORT:  
+CMGR:  
<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],  
<scts>,<dt>,<st>  
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-COMMAND:  
+CMGR:  
<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>,[<mn>],[<da>],  
[<toda>],<length><CR><LF><cdata>]  
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and CBM storage:  
+CMGR:  
<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,  
<pages><CR><LF><data>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMGR=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Returns messages with location index <index> from message storage  
<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refer  
command Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH), If the status of the  
message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received  
read’. If listing fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by  
<mem1>  
<stat>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Received unread message (new message)  
Received read message  
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)  
Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)  
270  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<oa>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <tooa>  
<da>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <toda>  
<toda>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)  
default is 145, otherwise default is 129  
<tooa>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (default refer <toda>)  
<tora>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in  
integer format (default refer <toda>)  
<alpha>  
Description  
String type  
Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not  
omitted, i.e. commas shall mark the place were it should  
be. Used character set should be the one selected with  
command Select TE Character Set +CSCS  
<scts>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string  
format (refer <dt>)  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
271  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<data>  
The entered text should be formatted as follows:  
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and  
<fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:  
if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set  
+CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabet  
according to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete last  
character and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four  
character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return  
entered by the user);  
if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRA  
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bit  
characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to  
character Π (GSM 23));  
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo> indicates  
that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered text should  
consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts  
into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be converted to an  
octet with integer value 42);  
sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27)  
<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body  
<fo>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format  
First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format  
First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format  
First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message_Reference  
<ra>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address-Value field. BCD (or GSM  
default alphabet) are converted to characters of the  
currently selected TE character set (refef command  
+CSCS. Type of address given by <tosca>  
<dt>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in string format "yy/mm/  
dd,hh:mm:ss±zz where characters indicate year, month,  
day, hour,minutes, seconds and time zone  
<st>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-status  
272  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<ct>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP--command-type. Default value is 0  
<sn>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.41 CBM serial number  
<mid>  
Description  
String type  
All different possible combinations of CBM message  
identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);  
e.g. “0,1,5-7”  
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM message identifier in integer format  
<page>  
Description  
Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 4-7 in integer format  
<pages>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 0-3 in integer format  
<pid>  
Description  
0 - 255  
Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,  
according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9  
<dcs>  
Description  
0 - 255  
Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.48. UCS2 and  
compressed text not supported  
<sca>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address-Value field in string  
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet  
characters) are converted to characters of the currently  
selected TE character set  
<tosca>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 04.11 RP SC address type-of-address octet in integer  
format  
129  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international  
unknown  
145  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7  
161  
128 - 255  
273  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<vp>  
Description  
0 - 143  
(TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e. 5 minute intervals up to 12 hous)  
12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)  
(TP-VP-166) x 1 day  
144 - 167  
168 - 196  
197 - 255  
(TP-VP-192) x 1 week  
<mn>  
Description  
Integer type  
GSM 03.40 TP-message-number  
Example  
AT+CMGR  
R1A100  
CXC1122112  
OK  
15.12 AT+CMGL List Message  
PDU Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
List message  
AT+CMGL [=<stat>] • +CMGL:  
<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length>  
<CR><LF><pdu>[<CR><LF>  
+CMGL:  
<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length>  
<CR><LF><pdu>[…]]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMGL=?  
• +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)  
Note!  
Returns messages with status value <stat> from preferred message  
storage <mem1> to the TE. Entire data units <pdu> are returned. If  
status of the message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes  
to ‘received read’. If listing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR:  
<err> is returned.  
<stat>  
Description  
0
Received unread message (i.e. new message)  
274  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<stat>  
Description  
1
2
3
4
Received read message  
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)  
Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)  
All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
<alpha>  
Description  
String type  
Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not  
omitted  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
<pdu>  
Description  
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by  
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts  
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long  
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is  
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))  
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format  
275  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Text Mode  
Description  
List message  
Command  
Possible Responses  
AT+CMGL  
=[<stat>]  
• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-SUBMITs and SMS-  
DELIVERs:  
+CMGL:  
<index1>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],  
[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]  
<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>  
+CMGL:  
<index2>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],  
[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]  
<CR><LF><data>[…]]  
• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-STATUS-REPORT:  
+CMGL:  
<index1>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>, [<ra>],  
[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> [<CR><LF>  
+CMGL:  
<index2>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],  
[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>[…]]  
If text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and SMS-COMMANDs:  
+CMGL:  
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct> [<CR><LF>  
+CMGL:  
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[…]]  
• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command  
successful and CBM storage:  
+CMGL:  
<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,  
<pages>,<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>  
+CMGL:  
<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,  
<pages><CR><LF> <data>[…]]  
• Otherwise:  
+CMS ERROR: <err>  
Show the  
current  
setting  
AT+CMGL?  
• +CMGL:<stat>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CMGL=?  
• +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
Returns messages with status value <stat> from message storage  
<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refer  
command Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH). If the status, of the  
message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received  
read’. If listing fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by  
<mem1>  
276  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<stat>  
Description  
Integer  
Indicates the status of messages in memory  
Received unread message (new message)  
Received read message  
0
1
2
3
4
Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)  
Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)  
All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)  
<oa>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <tooa>  
<da>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;  
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are  
converted to characters of the currently selected TE  
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given  
by <toda>  
<toda>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)  
default is 145, otherwise default is 129  
<tooa>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet  
in integer format (default refer <toda>)  
<tora>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in  
integer format (default refer <toda>)  
<alpha>  
Description  
String type  
Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not  
omitted i.e.  
commas shall mark the place were it should be. Used  
character set should be the one selected with command  
Select TE Character Set +CSCS  
277  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<scts>  
Description  
String type  
GSM 03.40 TP-service-centre-time-stamp in time-string  
format (refer <dt>)  
<length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of  
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC  
address octets are not counted in the length)  
<data>  
The entered text should be formatted as follows:  
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and  
<fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:  
if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set  
+CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabet  
according to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete last  
character and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four  
character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return  
entered by the user);  
if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRA  
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bit  
characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to  
character Π (GSM 23));  
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo> indicates  
that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered text should  
consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts  
into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be converted to an  
octet with integer value 42);  
sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27)  
<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body  
<fo>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format  
First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format  
First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format  
First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format  
<mr>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference  
<ra>  
Description  
String  
GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address-Value field. BCD (or GSM  
default alphabet) are converted to characters of the  
currently selected TE character set (refef command  
+CSCS. Type of address given by <tosca>  
278  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
<dt>  
Description  
String  
GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in string format "yy/MM/  
dd,hh:mm:ss+-zz where characters indicate year, month,  
day, hour,minutes, seconds and time zone  
<st>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Status  
<ct>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type (default 0)  
<sn>  
Description  
Integer  
GSM 03.41 CBM Serial Number  
<mid>  
Description  
String type  
All different possible combinations of CBM message  
identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);  
e.g. "0,1,5-7"  
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integer  
format  
<page>  
Description  
Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM Page Parameter bits 4-7 in integer format  
<pages>  
Description  
Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM Page Parameter bits 0-3 in integer format  
Example  
AT+CMGF=1  
OK  
AT+CMGL=?  
+CMGL: “REC UNREAD”,“REC READ”,“STO UNSENT”,“STO  
SENT”,“ALL”  
OK  
279  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
15.13 AT+CMGD Delete Message  
Common for both PDU and Text modes  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Delete message  
AT+CMGD=<index>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CMGD=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Deletes message from preferred message storage <mem1> location  
<index>. If deleting fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is  
returned. Test command shows the valid memory locations.  
<index>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value in the range of location numbers supported by the  
associated memory  
15.14 AT+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters  
Only Applicable to Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set the show text  
mode  
AT+CSDH=[<show>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CSDH?  
• +CSDH: <show>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CSDH=?  
• +CSDH: (list of  
supported <show>s)  
• OK  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Controls whether detailed header information is shown in text mode  
result codes.  
<show>  
Description  
0
Do not show header values defined in commands  
AT+CSCA and AT+CSMP (<sca>, <tosca>, <fo>, <vp>,  
<pid> and <dcs>) nor <length>, <toda> or <tooa> in  
+CMT, +CMGL, +CMGR result codes for SMS-DELIVERs and  
SMS-SUBMITs in text mode; for SMS-COMMANDs in +CMGR  
result code, do not show <pid>, <mn>, <da>, <toda>,  
<length> or <cdata>  
1
Show the values in result codes  
280  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
15.15 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters  
Only Applicable to Text Mode  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set the text mode  
parameters  
AT+CSMP=[<fo  
> [,<vp>[,<pid>  
[,<dcs>]]]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CSMP?  
• +CSMP: <fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CSMP=?  
• +CSMP: (List of supported <fo>s),  
(list of supported <vp>s), (list of  
supported <pid>s), (list of  
supported <dcs>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Used to select values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent  
to the network or placed in a storage when text format message mode is  
selected. It is possible to set the validity period starting from when the  
SM is received by the SMSC (<vp> is in range 0… 255). The <pid>  
parameter identifies the higher protocol being used or indicates  
interworking with a certain type of telematic service and <dcs>  
determines the way the information is encoded as in GSM 03.38.  
<fo>  
Description  
0-255  
Depending on the command or result code: first octet of  
GSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default value  
17),SMS-STATUS-REPORT, or SMS-COMMAND (default value  
2) in integer format  
<vp>  
Description  
0-143  
(TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e 5 minutes intervals up to 12 hous)  
12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)  
(TP-VP-166) x 1 day  
144-167  
168-196  
197-255  
(TP-VP-192) x 1 week  
<pid>  
Description  
0-255  
Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,  
according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9  
<dcs>  
Description  
0-255  
Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.38. UCS2 and  
compressed text not supported  
281  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
15.16 AT+CSCS Select Character Set  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set command informs  
TA which character set  
is used by the TE  
AT+CSCS=<chset>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CSCS?  
• +CSCS: <chset>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CSCS=?  
• +CSCS: (list of  
supported <chset>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command informs the TA which character set <chset> is used by  
the TE. The TA is then able to convert character strings correctly  
between TE and ME character sets.  
When TA-TE interface is set to 8-bit operation and the used TE alphabet  
is 7-bit, the highest bit shall be set to zero.  
Note!  
How the internal alphabet of ME is converted to, or from, the TE  
alphabet is manufacturer specific.  
Read command shows current setting and test command display  
conversion schemes implemented in the TA.  
<chset>  
Description  
“GSM”  
GSM default alphabet (GSM 03.38 subclause 6.2.1).  
Default value  
“IRA”  
International reference alphabet (ITU-T T.50). Note:  
recommended default value by GSM 07.07.  
“8859-n”  
“UTF-8”  
ISO 8859 Latin n (1-6) character set  
Universal text format, 8 bits  
“ERICSSON”  
Unicode, 16-bit universal multiple-octet coded character  
set (ISO/IEC10646)  
Example  
AT+CSCS?  
+CSCS: “GSM”  
OK  
282  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
15.17 AT+CSMS Select Message Service  
Common for both PDU and Text Modes  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Select message  
service  
AT+CSMS=<service>  
• +CSMS:  
<mt>,<mo>,<bm>  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CSMS?  
• +CSMS:  
<service>,<mt>,<mo>,  
<bm>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CSMS=?  
• +CSMS: (list of  
supported <service>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects messaging service <service>. It returns the types of messages  
supported by the ME: <mt> for mobile terminated messages, <mo> for  
mobile originated messages and <bm> for broadcast type messages. If  
the chosen service is not supported by the ME (but is supported by the  
TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.  
<service>  
Description  
0
GSM 03.40 and 03.41. The syntax of SMS AT commands is  
compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version 4.7.0; Phase 2+  
features which do not require new command syntax may  
be supported (e.g. correct routing of messages with new  
Phase 2+ data coding schemes)  
2..127  
Reserved  
<mt>  
Description  
0
1
Mobile terminated messages not supported  
Mobile terminated messages supported  
<mo>  
Description  
0
1
Mobile originated messages not supported  
Mobile originated messages supported  
<bm>  
Description  
0
1
Broadcast messages not supported  
Broadcast messages supported  
283  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<err>  
Description  
0...127  
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values  
128...255  
300  
GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values  
ME failure  
302  
Operation not allowed  
Invalid PDU mode parameter  
SIM not inserted  
304  
310  
311  
SIM PIN required  
312  
PH-SIM PIN required  
SIM failure  
313  
314  
SIM busy  
315  
SIM wrong  
316  
SIM PUK required  
317  
SIM PIN2 required  
318  
SIM PUK2 required  
Unknown error  
500  
...511  
512...  
Other values in range 256...511 are reserved  
Manufacturer specific  
15.18 AT*E2SMSRIRing indicator for SMS  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Enable RI for incoming  
SMS  
AT*E2SMSRI=<n>  
AT*E2SMSRI=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
• *E2SMSRI: <n>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2SMSRI=?  
• *E2SMSRI: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command enables/disables the Ring Indicator pin response to an  
incoming SMS message. If enabled, a negative going pulse is generated  
on receipt of an incoming SMS message. The duration of this pulse is  
selectable in steps of 50ms up to a maximum of 1,150ms and is  
determined by the value of <n> that is used in the command. The  
command is disabled by setting <n> to 0.  
284  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
15. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT  
Note!  
The Ring Indicator will always be active for incoming calls independent  
of this setting.  
<n>  
Description  
0
RI is disabled for incoming SMS messages. Default value  
50-1150  
RI is enabled for incoming SMS messages. Pulse duration  
selectable between 50 and 1,150ms inclusive  
285  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
286  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
16. Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast  
16.1 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE  
16.2 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type  
Common for both PDU and text modes  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Select cell broadcast  
message type  
AT+CSCB=[<mode>  
[,<mids>]]  
• +CMS ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CSCB?  
• +CSCB:  
<mode>,<mids>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CSCB=?  
• +CSCB: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are accepted  
<mids>  
Description  
string type  
All different possible combinations of CBM message  
identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);  
e.g. “0,1,5-7”  
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integer  
format  
Example  
AT+CSCB?  
+CSCB: 0,“50”  
OK  
287  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
288  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
17. SIM Application Toolkit  
17.1 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control  
17.2 AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Set the presentation of  
the unsolicited result  
codes corresponding to  
STK  
AT*E2STKS=<on_off>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current setting  
AT*E2STKS?  
• *E2STKS: <on_off>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKS=?  
• *E2STKD: list of  
supported <on_off>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Allows the external application to disable or enable the presentation of  
the unsolicited result codes corresponding to the STK commands.  
Parameter <on_off> is used to disable or enable the presentation of an  
unsolicited result code *E2STK. Setting chosen is stored internally so  
that it is not necessary to change it each time the ME is switched on.  
If the presentation of the unsolicited result codes is disabled, the  
messages below are not sent to the application.  
The unsolicited result codes shall be disabled by default.  
<on_off>  
Description  
0
Disable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes  
related to STK. Default value  
1
Enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes  
related to STK  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
The unsolicited result codes defined in sections below can be received.  
289  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
17.3 AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display Text  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Answer to the  
reception of  
DISPLAY TEXT  
AT*E2STKD=<answer> • +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKD=?  
• *E2STKD:  
(list of supported <answer>)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The ME passes the parameters within DISPLAY TEXT command to  
the external application by means of the unsolicited result code  
*E2STKD.  
Command AT*E2STKD allows the external application to send the  
appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and  
before the timeout expires.  
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR  
response is generated.  
Test command returns the list of supported <answer>. Values follow  
GSM 11.14 standard  
<answer>  
Description  
0
OK.  
Performed as required: the text was displayed and  
cleared as requested. It corresponds to ‘00’ Command  
performed successfully, described in the GSM standard  
1
2
3
4
Failed.  
User Terminated Session: the text was displayed as  
requested and the user wants to end the proactive  
session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive session terminated  
by the user, described in the GSM standard  
Failed.  
User requests backwards move: the text was displayed as  
requested and the user wants to go backwards in the  
session. It corresponds to ‘11’ Backward move in the  
proactive SIM session requested by the user  
Failed.  
No response from user: the text was displayed, and  
although the clear condition was “Wait for user to clear”,  
the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response  
from user  
Failed.  
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*E2STKD: <priority>,<clear_condition>,<coding>,<text_length>,  
<text>  
290  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<priority>  
Description  
0
1
Display normal priority text  
Display high priority text  
<clear_condition>  
Description  
0
1
Clear message after a dalay  
Wait for user to clear message  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-  
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set  
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in  
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit  
GSM default alphabet  
<text_length>  
Description  
Integter type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>  
<text>  
Description  
string type  
Field of maximum length <text_length>, in string type  
format between "". Coding is defined in <coding>  
17.4 AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Answer to the  
reception of  
GET INKEY  
AT*E2STKG=<answer>, • +CME ERROR <err>  
[<response_type>,  
<user_response>]  
• OK  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKG=?  
• *E2STKG:  
(list of supported <answer>),  
(list of supported  
<response_type>),  
<user_response>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The ME passes the parameters within GET INKEY command to the  
external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKG.  
The external application then sends AT*E2STKG with the user  
response.  
291  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Answer command allows the external application to send the  
appropriate answer, after receiving the unsolicited result code, and  
before the timeout expires.  
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR  
response is generated.  
If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more  
parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates  
ERROR.  
Test command returns the list of supported values, and the maximum  
value of <prompt_text_length>.  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<answer>  
Description  
0
OK.  
Performed as required: the text was displayed. It  
corresponds to ‘00’ Command performed successfully,  
described in the GSM standard  
1
2
3
Failed.  
User Terminated Session: the text was displayed as  
requested and the user wants to end the proactive  
session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive session  
terminated by the user, described in the GSM standard  
Failed.  
User requests backward move: the text was displayed  
as requested and the user wants to go backwards in  
the session. It corresponds to ‘11’ Backward move in  
the proactive SIM session requested by the user  
Failed.  
No response from user: the text was displayed, and the  
user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ No response  
from user  
4
Failed.  
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed  
<response_type>  
Description  
0
1
3
Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +)  
Response type shall be SMS default alphabet  
Response type shall be “Yes/No” response  
<user_response>  
Description  
String type  
Field of 1 to 2 bytes length in string type format  
between “”. Coding is defined in <response_type>.  
Length shall be 2 bytes when coding is UCS2 .  
Otherwise it shall be 1 byte  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*E2STKG: <coding>,<prompt_text_length>,<prompt_text>  
292  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS  
default 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38  
with bit 8 set to 0. It corresponds to data coding  
scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default  
7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as  
defined in GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding  
scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet  
<prompt_text_length>  
Description  
Integer type (0-235)  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<prompt_text>  
<prompt_text>  
Description  
String type  
Field of maximum length <prompt_text_length>, in  
string type format between “”. Coding is defined in  
<prompt_coding>.  
17.5 AT*E2STKI M2M STK Get Input  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Answer to the  
reception of GET  
INPUT  
AT*E2STKI=<answer>, • +CME ERROR <err>  
[<response_type>,  
<response_length>,  
<user_response>]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKI=?  
• *E2STKI: (list of supported  
<answer>),(list of supported  
<response_type>),  
<response_length>,  
<user_response>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The ME passes the parameters within GET INPUT command to the  
external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKI.  
The external application sends AT*E2STKI with the user response.  
AT*E2STKI allows the external application to send the appropriate  
answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the  
timeout expires.  
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR  
response is generated.  
If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more  
parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates  
ERROR.  
293  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Test command returns the list of suported values, and  
<prompt_text_length>.  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<answer>  
Description  
0
OK.  
Performed as required: the text was displayed. It corresponds  
to ‘00’ command performed succesfully, described in the GSM  
standard  
1
2
Failed.  
User terminated session: the text was displayed as requested  
and the user wants to end the proactive session. It corresponds  
to ‘10’ proactive session terminated by the user, described in  
the GSM standard  
Failed.  
User requests backward move: the text was displayed as  
requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session.  
It corresponds to ‘11’ backward move in the proactive SIM  
session requested by the user  
3
4
Failed.  
No response from user: the text was displayed, and the user  
did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ No response from user  
Failed.  
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed  
<response_type>  
Description  
0
1
3
Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +)  
Response type shall be SMS default alphabet  
Response type shall be “Yes/No” response  
<response_length>  
Description  
Integer type (0-160)  
Value indicating the length of response field  
<user_response>. It shall be an integer within the  
range between <min_length_response> and  
<max_length_response>  
<user_response>  
Description  
String type  
Field of length between <min_length_response> and  
<max_length_response>, in string type format between  
"". Coding is defined in <response_type>.  
Note!  
If <response_type>=3 (Yes/No), the length of <user_response> is  
1 byte. Otherwise, the ME gives an ERROR message.  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*E2STKI: <min_length_response>,<max_length_response>,  
<echo_input>,<prompt_coding>,<prompt_text_length>,  
<prompt_text>  
294  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<min_length_response>  
Description  
Integer type (0-160)  
Value indicating the minimum length of  
response field <user_response>  
<max_length_response> Description  
Integer type (0-160)  
Value indicating the maximum length of  
response field <user_response>  
<echo_input>  
Description  
0
1
The user input shall be echoed  
The user input shall be hidden  
<prompt_coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS  
default 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in  
GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set to 0. It corresponds to  
data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
2
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS  
default 7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit  
octets, as defined in GSM 03.38. It corresponds  
to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default  
alphabet  
Text is coded in UCS2 alphabet, as defined in  
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding  
scheme of 16 bit UCS2 alphabet  
<prompt_text_length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<prompt_text>  
<prompt_text>  
Description  
String type  
Field of maximum length <prompt_text_length>,  
in string type between “”. Coding is defined in  
<prompt_coding>  
295  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
17.6 AT*E2STKL M2M STK Select Item  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Answer to the  
reception of  
SELECT ITEM  
AT*E2STKL=<answer>, • +CME ERROR <err>  
[<user_response>]  
AT*E2STKL=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
• *E2STKL: (list of supported  
<answer>),  
(list of supported  
<user_response>)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The ME passes the parameters within SELECT ITEM command to the  
external application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKL.  
Command AT*E2STKL allows the external application to send the  
appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and  
before the timeout expires.  
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR  
response is be generated.  
If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more  
parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates  
ERROR.  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<answer>  
Description  
0
OK.  
Performed as required. It corresponds to ‘00’ command  
performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard  
1
2
Failed.  
User terminated session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive  
session terminated by the user, described in the GSM  
standard  
Failed.  
User requests backwards move. It corresponds to ‘11’  
Backward move in the proactive SIM session requested  
by the user  
3
4
Failed.  
No response from user. It corresponds to ‘12’ no  
response from user  
Failed.  
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed  
<user_response> Description  
integer type  
The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. It  
identifies the selected <item_idn> within the items list  
296  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
E2STKL: <NbrOfItems>,<coding>,<text_length>,<alpha_id>  
[,<default>]<CR><LF>E2STKL: <item_id1>,<coding>,  
<text_length>,<item1><CR><LF>[…]E2STKL: <item_idn>,  
<coding>,<text_length>,<itemn><CR><LF>]  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default  
7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8  
set to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-  
bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined  
in GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of  
7 bit GSM default alphabet  
<text_length>  
Description  
Integer type  
(0-240)  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<alpha_id>, <itemn1>,.<Itemn>  
<alpha_id>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to  
AND  
EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
The maximum length is fixed  
<default>  
Description  
Integer type  
The <default> parameter is a single byte between 1 and  
255. It shows the default/selected item within the list  
<item_idn>  
Description  
Integer type  
The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. Each  
item <itemn> in the list shall have a unique identifer  
<item_idn>  
<itemn>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to  
AND  
EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
<NbrOfItems>  
Description  
Integer type  
Number of items to be presented in the following  
unsolicited results  
The maximum length is fixed.  
297  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
17.7 AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Answer to the  
reception of SET  
UP MENU  
AT*E2STKM=<answer>,  
<on_off>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKM=?  
• *E2STKM: (list of supported  
<answer>),(list of supported  
<on_off>)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The ME passes the parameters within SET UP MENU command to the  
external application, so that the STK menu can be built externally, by  
means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKM.  
The current menu can be removed by sending only the parameter  
<on_off> = 0.  
Answer command allows the external application to send the  
appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and  
before the timeout expires.  
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR  
response is generated.  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<answer>  
Description  
0
OK.  
Performed as required: it corresponds to ‘00’ command  
performed successfully, described in the GSM standard  
1
2
3
Failed.  
User Terminated Session: the command was executed as  
requested and the user wants to end the proactive  
session. It corresponds to ‘10’ proactive session terminated  
by the user, described in the GSM standard  
Failed.  
User requests backwards move: the command was  
executed as requested and the user wants to go  
backwards in the session. It corresponds to ‘11’ backward  
move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user  
Failed.  
No response from user: the command was executed, and  
the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response  
from user  
4
5
Failed.  
Screen is busy  
Failed.  
Command beyond MEs capability. It corresponds to ‘30’.  
It was not possible to successfully integrate or remove the  
list of menu items  
298  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
<on_off>  
Description  
0
1
Remove the current menu  
New menu to be displayed  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*E2STKM: <NbrOfItems>,<coding>,<text_length>,  
<alpha_id><CR><LF>E2STKM: <item_id1>,<coding>,  
<text_length>,<item1>[<CR><LF>[…]E2STKM: <item_idn>,  
<coding>,<text_length>,<itemn>]  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-  
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set  
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in  
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit  
GSM default alphabet  
<text_length>  
Description  
Integer type  
Value indicating the maximum length of field <alpha_id>,  
<itemn1>, <Itemn>  
<alpha_id>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type between "". Coding is according to  
AND  
EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
The maximum length is fixed.  
<item_idn>  
Description  
Integer type  
The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. Each  
item <itemn> in the list shall have a unique identifer  
<item_idn>  
<itemn>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type format between “”. Coding is  
according to EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
AND  
<NbrOfltems>  
Description  
Integer type  
Number of Items to be presented in the following  
unsolicited results  
The maximum length is fixed.  
299  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
The parameters have no default values.  
17.8 AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Do the menu  
selection  
AT*E2STKN=<sel_item>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKN=?  
• *E2STKN: (list of supported  
<sel_item>)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The application informs the ME about the selected menu item by means  
of the AT*E2SKTN command. The ME answers with OK, or ERROR.  
The Do command allows the external application to select the menu  
item in the item list that was created by means of the SET-UP MENU  
command.  
<sel_item>  
Description  
Integer type  
The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. It  
identifies the selected menu item corresponding to SET-UP  
MENU command. Values follow the definition described in  
GSM 11.14  
17.9 AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call  
Description  
Command  
Possible responses  
Answer to the  
reception of SET UP  
CALL  
AT*E2STKC=<answer> • +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT*E2STKC=?  
• *E2STKC: (list of supported  
<answer>)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
The ME passes the parameters within SET UP CALL command to the  
external application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKC,  
so that it takes up the decision on progressing or rejecting the call.  
Answer command allows the external application to send the  
appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and  
before the timeout expires.  
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR  
response is generated.  
300  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<answer>  
Description  
0
OK.  
Performed as required. It corresponds to ‘00’ command  
performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard  
1
2
3
Failed.  
User terminated session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive  
session terminated by the user, described in the GSM  
standard  
Failed.  
User requests backwards move. It corresponds to ‘11’  
backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by  
the user  
Failed.  
No response from user. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response  
from user  
4
6
7
Failed.  
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed  
Failed.  
User rejected call set-up request. It corresponds to ‘22’  
Failed.  
User cleared down call before connection or network  
release. It corresponds to ‘23’  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*E2STKC: <ton>,<dial_string>,<SetUpRequirement>,<coding>,  
<text_length>,<alpha_id>  
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.  
<ton>  
Description  
Integer type  
Field of 1 byte indicating the Type of Number, coded as  
for EF  
. See GSM 04-08, section 10.5.4.7 for the allowed  
AND  
values  
<dial_string>  
Description  
String type  
Phone number of format <ton>  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-  
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set  
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in  
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit  
GSM default alphabet  
301  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<text_length>  
Integer type (0-240)  
Description  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<alpha_id>  
<alpha_id>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to  
AND  
EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
The maximum length is fixed  
17.10 *E2STKE  
STK Send Short Message  
Unsolicited Result Code:  
*E2STKE: <coding>, < text_length >, <alpha_id>  
The ME passes the <alpha_id> within SEND SHORT MESSAGE  
command to the external application, by means of the unsolicited result  
code *E2STKE. This informs the external application that the ME is  
sending an SMS.  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set to 0. It  
corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in GSM  
03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM  
default alphabet  
<text_length>  
Description  
Integer type (0-240)  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<alpha_id>  
<alpha_id>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type format between “”. Coding is  
according to EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
AND  
‘FF’  
In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha  
identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give ‘FF’  
to indicate “Sending SMS”, so that the external  
application is informed  
The maximum length is fixed.  
302  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
17.11 *E2STKP  
STK Send SS  
Unsolicited Result Code:  
*E2STKP: <ton>, <SS_string>, <coding>, <text_length>, <alpha_id>,  
<SS_return>  
The ME passes the parameters within SEND SS command to the  
external application, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKP.  
This informs the external application that the ME has sent an SS string  
to the network, and provides the current status after this operation.  
<ton>  
Description  
integer type  
Field of 1 byte indicating the Type of Number, coded as  
for EF  
. See GSM 04-08, section 10.5.4.7 for the allowed  
AND  
values  
<SS_string>  
Description  
String type  
SS string of format <ton>  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-  
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set  
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in  
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7-bit  
GSM default alphabet  
<text_length>  
Description  
Integer type (0-240)  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<alpha_id>  
<alpha_id>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type format between “”. Coding is  
according to EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
AND  
‘FF’  
In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha  
identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give ‘FF’  
to indicate “SS string sent” so that the external application  
is informed  
The maximum length is fixed.  
<SS_return>  
Description  
Integer type  
Field of 1 byte indicating the SS Return Result Operation  
code, as defined in GSM 04.80, so that the external  
application is informed about the result of the SS  
operation  
303  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
17.12 *E2STKU  
STK Send USSD  
Unsolicited Result Code:  
*E2STKU: <coding>, <text_length>, <alpha_id>  
Description:  
The ME shall passes the <alpha_id> parameter within SEND USSD  
command to the external application, by means of the unsolicited result  
code *E2STKU. This informs the external application that the ME is  
sending a USSD string to the network.  
<coding>  
Description  
0
Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-  
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set  
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit  
1
Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit  
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in  
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7-bit  
GSM default alphabet  
<text_length>  
Description  
Integer type (0-240)  
Value indicating the maximum length of field  
<alpha_id>  
<alpha_id>  
Description  
String type  
Field of string type format between “”. Coding is  
according to EF  
as defined in GSM 11.11  
AND  
‘FF’  
In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha  
identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give ‘FF’  
to indicate “SS string sent” so that the external application  
is informed  
The maximum length is fixed.  
304  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
17. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT  
17.13 *E2STKR  
STK Refresh  
Unsolicited Result Code:  
*E2STKR: <indicator>  
The ME informs the external application about the coming REFRESH  
command, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKR (eg Reset  
is coming).  
<indicator>  
Description  
Integer type  
Indicator describes the mode that the SIM has requested  
when sending a REFRESH command  
0
1
2
3
4
SIM initialization and full file change notification  
File change notification  
SIM initialization and file change notification  
SIM initialization  
SIM reset  
17.14 AT*E2STKTO  
SIM Application Toolkit Settings  
Parameter Command Syntax:  
AT*E2STKTO = <Command>, <timer>  
This command allows the external application to configure some  
general settings related to STK.  
Defined values:  
Parameter <Command> is used to define the command that the time  
parameter is going to be applied.  
Parameter <timer> is used to fix the timeout period applicable to  
Proactive SIM mechanism.  
<Command>  
Description  
Integer type (0-6)  
It defines the command that the time parameter is  
going to be applied  
0
1
All the commands with timeout associated are set  
to the value of <timer>  
Set Up Menu command timeout is set to the value  
of <timer>  
305  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<Command>  
Description  
2
3
4
5
Set Up Call command timeout is set to the value of  
<timer>  
Display Text command timeout is set to the value of  
<timer>  
Get Input command timeout is set to the value of  
<timer>  
Select Item command timeout is set to the value of  
<timer>  
<timer>  
Description  
Integer type (0-99)  
Specifies the value in seconds to be set in the  
timeout associated with the command specified in  
<command>  
0
All the commands timeouts are set to its default  
value  
(1-99)  
The timeout of the command specified in  
<command> is set to this value  
Unsolicited result code:  
*E2STKTO: <command>  
306  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
18. Supplementary Services  
18.1 AT+CPIN  
PIN Control  
18.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Reset the ACM  
(Accumulated Call  
Meter) value on the  
SIM  
AT+CACM=[<passwd>] • +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CACM?  
• +CACM: <acm>  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CACM=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Resets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter value in  
SIM file EF . ACM contains the total number of home units for both  
ACM  
the current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is usually required to reset  
the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is  
Note!  
This command must take into account what line is chosen with  
AT*ELIN.  
Read command returns the current value of ACM.  
<passwd>  
Description  
String type  
SIM-PIN2  
<acm>  
Description  
String type  
Accumulated call meter value similarly coded as <ccm>  
under +CAOC  
307  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
18.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set command sets the  
Advice of Charge  
related accumulated  
call meter maximum  
value in SIM file  
AT+CAMM=[<acmmax> • +CME ERROR: <err>  
[,<passwd>]]  
AT+CAMM?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
EF  
ACMmax  
Show the current  
setting  
• +CAMM:  
<acmmax>  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CAMM=?  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter maximum  
value in SIM file EF . ACMmax contains the maximum number  
ACMmax  
of home units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber. When ACM  
(refer +CACM) reaches ACMmax calls are prohibited. SIM PIN2 is  
usually required to set the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME  
ERROR: <err> is returned.  
Read command returns the current value of ACMmax.  
<acmmax>  
Description  
String type  
Accumulated call meter maximum value similarly coded  
as <ccm> under +CAOC; value zero disables ACMmax  
feature  
<passwd>  
Description  
String type  
SIM PIN2  
308  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
18.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Execute command  
AT+CAOC[=<mode>]  
• [+CAOC: <ccm>]  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CAOC?  
• +CAOC: <mode>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CAOC=?  
• [+CAOC: (list of  
supported  
<mode>s]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Use of Advice of Charge supplementary service command enables the  
subscriber to get information about the cost of calls. With <mode>=0,  
the execute command returns the current call meter value from the ME.  
The command also includes the possibility to enable an unsolicited  
event reporting of the CCM information. The unsolicited result code  
+CCCM: <ccm> is sent when the CCM value changes, but no more than  
every 10 seconds. Deactivation of the unsolicited event reporting is  
made with the same command.  
Read command indicates whether the unsolicited reporting is activated  
or not. Read command is available when the unsolicited result code is  
supported.  
It is recommended (although optional) that the test command return the  
supported mode values.  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
2
Query CCM value  
Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value  
Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value  
<ccm>  
Description  
String type  
Three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal  
format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30); value is  
in home units and bytes are similarly coded as ACMmax  
value in the SIM  
309  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
18.5 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set command sets the  
parameters of Advice  
of Charge related  
AT+CPUC=<currency>,  
<ppu>[,<passwd>]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
price per unit and  
currency table in SIM  
file EF  
PUCT  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CPUC?  
• +CPUC:  
<currency>,<ppu>  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CPUC=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit and  
currency table in SIM file EF . PUCT information can be used to  
PUCT  
convert the home units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM)  
into currency units. SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2 (depending on which SIM  
card that is used) is required to set the parameters. If setting fails in an  
ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.  
Read command returns the current parameters of PUCT.  
For information on the character set see AT+CSCS in the Short  
Message Services section.  
<currency>  
Description  
String  
Alpha-identifier of the currency code (3 characters, e.g.  
SEK)  
<ppu>  
Description  
String type  
price per unit; dot is used as a decimal separator (e.g.  
“2.66”)  
<passwd>  
Description  
String type  
SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2  
310  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
18.6 AT*EDIF  
Ericsson Divert Function  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Enable and disable  
notification with the  
unsolicited result code  
*EDIF  
AT*EDIF=<onoff>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*EDIF?  
• *EDIF: <onoff>  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EDIF=?  
• *EDIF: (list of  
supported <onoff>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command enables and disables notification of divert status changes  
with the unsolicited result code *EDIF.  
<onoff>  
Description  
0
1
Disable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF  
Enable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*EDIF: <reason>,<status>,<classx>[,<number>,<type>]  
311  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
18.7 AT*EIPS  
Identity Presentation Set  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Sets the alpha tag to  
be displayed in the ME  
AT*EIPS=<ID>,  
<alphatag mode>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*EIPS?  
• *EIPS: <ID1>,<alphatag  
mode1><CR><LF>  
*EIPS: <ID2>,<alphatag  
mode2><CR><LF>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*EIPS=?  
• *EIPS: (list of supported  
ID>s),(list of supported  
<alphatag mode>s)  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command enables or disables the presentation of the alpha tag of  
the Caller ID and Called ID to the TE if the ID is recognized. The alpha  
tag is the first name and the last name. The presentation is done by an  
unsolicited result code, *ELIP for Caller ID and *EOLP for Called ID.  
<ID>  
Description  
1
2
Caller ID (*ELIP)  
Called ID (*EOLP)  
<alphatag mode>  
Description  
0
1
Off  
First name and last name displayed  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
*ELIP:<alpha tag>  
*EOLP:<alpha tag>  
312  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
18.8 AT*ELIN  
Ericsson Line Set  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set the current line to  
<line>  
AT*ELIN=<line>  
• *ELIN: <line>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*ELIN?  
• *ELIN: <line>  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*ELIN=?  
• *ELIN: list of  
supported <line>s  
+CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command requests the ME to set the current line to <line>.  
Note!  
The following command reads its value from the current line and is thus  
affected by the use of *ELIN:  
AT+CACM - Accumulated Call Meter  
<line>  
Description  
1
2
L1  
L2  
18.9 AT*E2SSD M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Send Supplementary  
Service command  
AT*E2SSD=<SS_String>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2SSD=?  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command allows the user to send a Public MMI command string  
in order to activate, deactivate, interrogate or modify settings for  
Supplementary Services.  
Once a string is sent, the command will return OK if parsed and sent  
successfully, otherwise ERROR is returned. The command does not  
verify that the operation executes successfully - use the AT*E2SSI  
command to gain feedback of the operation status.  
313  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
       
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Refer to GSM 02.30 for Public MMI services and codes.  
<SS_String>  
Description  
String Type  
String in double quotes, containing a Public MMI  
command to modify, activate, interrogate or deactivate  
a Supplementary Service. String can contain values  
‘0-9’, ‘*’ and ‘#’  
18.10 AT*E2SSI M2M Supplementary Service Indications  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Set Supplementary  
Service indications  
AT*E2SSI=<op>  
• ERROR  
• OK  
Show the current  
setting  
AT*E2SSI?  
*E2SSI: <op>  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT*E2SSI=?  
• *E2SSI: (list of  
supported <op>s)  
• ERROR  
This command allows the user to display the unsolicited response code  
*E2SSI on network responses (either command confirmation or error  
responses) for Supplementary Services. This can be used in conjunction  
with the AT+CSSN command which gives responses on the network  
notification of SS status.  
The default setting is OFF, where responses are disabled.  
<op>  
Description  
0
1
Disable *E2SSI indications. Default value  
Enable *E2SSI indications  
Unsolicited Result codes:  
*E2SSI: <errorcode>[,<Opcode>[,<SS_Code>,[<BasicServChoice>,  
<BasicServValue>],[<SS_Status>],[<ForwardedToNr>],  
[<NoReplyConditionTime>], [<CLI_RestrictionOption>]]]  
or  
*E2SSI: <errorcode>[,<Opcode>[,<SS_Code>,[<BasicServChoice>,  
<BasicServValue>],[<SS_Status>],[<SubscriptionOption>]]]  
<errorcode>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
OK (no error)  
SSI_PASSWORD_ERROR  
SSI_TOO_MANY_PARTS  
SSI_COMMAND_ERROR  
314  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
<errorcode>  
Description  
4
SSI_SIM_ERROR  
5
SSI_NUMBER_ERR  
6
SSI_CALL_BARRED  
SSI_NOT_AVAILABLE  
SSI_UNSUCCESSFUL  
SSI_NOT_ALLOWED  
SSI_NETWORK_PROBLEM  
7
8
9
10  
<Opcode>  
Description  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
REGISTER_SS  
ERASE_SS  
ACTIVATE_SS  
DEACTIVATE_SS  
INTERROGATE_SS  
<SScode>  
Description  
0
ALL_SS  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
32  
33  
40  
41  
42  
43  
49  
64  
65  
66  
67  
ALL_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_SERVICES  
CALLING_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_PRESENTATION  
CALLING_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_RESTRICTION  
CONNECTED_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_PRESENTATION  
CONNECTED_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_RESTRICTION  
MALICIOUS_CALL_IDENTIFICATION  
ALL_FORWARDING_SERVICES  
CALL_FORWARDING_UNCONDITIONAL  
ALL_CONDITIONAL_FORWARDING_SERVICES  
CALL_FORWARDING_ON_MOBILE_SUBSCRIBER_BUSY  
CALL_FORWARDING_ON_NO_REPLY  
CALL_FORWARDING_ON_SUBSCRIBER_NOT_REACHABLE  
EXPLICIT_CALL_TRANSFER  
ALL_CALL_COMPLETION_SERVICES  
CALL_WAITING  
CALL_HOLD  
COMPLETION_OF_CALL_TO_BUSY_SUBSCRIBER  
315  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<SScode>  
Description  
81  
MULTI_PARTY  
112  
113  
114  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
ALL_CHARGING_SS  
ADVICE_OF_CHARGE_INFORMATION  
ADVICE_OF_CHARGE_CHARGING  
ALL_BARRING_SERVICES  
BARRING_OF_OUTGOING_CALLS  
BARRING_OF_ALL_OUTGOING_CALLS  
BARRING_OF_ALL_OUTGOING_INTERNATIONAL_CALLS  
BARRING_OF_ALL_OG_INTERNATIONAL_NON_HPLMN_  
DIRECTED_CALLS  
153  
154  
155  
BARRING_OF_INCOMING_CALLS  
BARRING_OF_ALL_INCOMING_CALLS  
BARRING_OF_ALL_IC_CALLS_WHEN_OUTSIDE_HPLMN  
<BasicServChoice>  
Description  
2
3
BEARER_SERVICE  
TELE_SERVICE  
<BasicServValue>  
Description  
<TELE_SERVICE>  
<BEARER_SERVICE>  
0
TS_ALL_TELE_SERVICES  
TS_SPEECH  
BS_ALL_BEARER_SERVICES  
BS_ALL_DATA_CDA_SERVICES  
BS_DATA_CDA_300BPS  
BS_DATA_CDA_1200BPS  
BS_DATA_CDA_2400BPS  
BS_DATA_CDA_4800BPS  
BS_DATA_CDA_9600BPS  
BS_ALL_DATA_CDS_SERVICES  
BS_DATA_CDS_300BPS  
16  
17  
18  
20  
21  
22  
24  
25  
26  
28  
29  
30  
32  
TS_TELEPHONY  
TS_EMERGENCY_CALLS  
BS_DATA_CDS_1200BPS  
BS_DATA_CDS_2400BPS  
BS_DATA_CDS_4800BPS  
BS_DATA_CDS_9600BPS  
TS_ALL_SHORT_MESSAGE_SERVICES BS_ALL_PAD_ACCESS_CA_SERVICES  
316  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
<BasicServValue>  
Description  
<TELE_SERVICE>  
<BEARER_SERVICE>  
33  
TS_SHORT_MESSAGE_MT_PP  
TS_SHORT_MESSAGE_MO_PP  
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_300BPS  
34  
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_1200BPS  
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_1200_75BPS  
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_2400BPS  
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_4800BPS  
BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_9600BPS  
BS_ALL_DATA_PDS_SERVICES  
35  
36  
37  
38  
40  
44  
BS_DATA_PDS_2400BPS  
45  
BS_DATA_PDS_4800BPS  
46  
BS_DATA_PDS_9600BPS  
48  
BS_ALL_ALTERNATE_SPEECH_DATA_CDA  
BS_ALL_ALTERNATE_SPEECH_DATA_CDS  
BS_ALL_SPEECH_FOLLOWED_BY_DATA_CDA  
BS_ALL_SPEECH_FOLLOWED_BY_DATA_CDS  
BS_ALL_DATA_CIRCUIT_ASYNCHRONOUS  
BS_ALL_DATA_CIRCUIT_SYNCHRONOUS  
BS_ALL_ASYNCHRONOUS_SERVICES  
56  
64  
TS_VIDEOTEX  
TS_TELETEX  
72  
80  
88  
96  
TS_ALL_FAX_SERVICES  
97  
TS_FAX_GROUP3_ALTER_SPEECH  
TS_AUTOMATIC_FAX_GROUP3  
TS_FAX_GROUP4  
98  
99  
104  
112  
120  
128  
208  
209  
BS_ALL_SYNCHRONOUS_SERVICES  
BS_12_KBIT_UNRESTRICTED_DIGITAL  
TS_ALL_DATA_SERVICES  
TS_ALL_TELESERVICES_EXCEPT_SMS  
TS_AUXILIARY_SPEECH  
TS_AUXILIARY_TELEPHONY  
<SS_Status>  
Description  
0
1
2
NO_FLAG_SET  
SS_STATUS_ACTIVE  
SS_STATUS_REGISTERED  
317  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<SS_Status>  
Description  
4
7
SS_STATUS_PROVISIONED  
SS_STATUS_PRA  
<ForwardedToNr>  
Description  
String  
Phone number string in double quotes  
<NoReplyConditionTime>  
Description  
0-65532  
Integer value for time  
<CLI_Restriction Option>  
Description  
0
1
2
PERMANENT  
TEMPORARY_DEFAULT_RESTRICTED  
TEMPORARY_DEFAULT_ALLOWED  
<Subscription Option>  
Description  
1
2
5
OVERRIDE_CATEGORY  
CLI_RESTRICTION_OPTION  
RESTRICTION_PER_CALL  
318  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
18.11 AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request  
AT+CCFC=<reason> • +CME ERROR <err>  
Calling  
,<mode>[,<number  
>[,<type>[,<class>  
[,<satype>]]]]  
• when <mode>=2 and  
command successful:  
+CCFC:  
forwarding  
number and  
conditions  
<status>,<class1>[,<number>,  
<type>[,<satype>]][<CR><LF>  
+CCFC:  
<status>,<class2>[,<number>,  
<type>[,<satype>  
]][...]]  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CCFC=?  
• + CCFC: (list of supported  
<reason>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command allows control of the call forwarding supplementary  
service. Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation, and status query  
are supported. When querying the status of a network service  
(<mode>=2) the response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should  
be returned only if service is not active for any <class>.  
<reason>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
Unconditional  
Mobile busy  
No reply  
Not reachable  
All call forwarding  
All conditional call forwarding  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
Disable  
Enable  
Query status  
Registration  
Erasure  
<number>  
Description  
string type  
String type phone number of forwarding address in format  
specified by <type>  
319  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<type>  
Description  
integer format  
129  
Type of address octet  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international  
unknown. Default value if ‘+’ is not in <sca>  
145  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number.  
Default value if ‘+’ is in <sca>  
161  
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number  
Other values  
128 - 255  
<satype>  
Description  
integer format  
128  
Type of subaddress octet  
NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), even number of address  
signals  
136  
NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), odd number of address  
signals  
160  
User defined, even number of address signals  
User defined, odd number of address signals  
Other values reserved  
168  
128 - 255  
<classx>  
Description  
integer  
Sum of integers each representing a class of information.  
Default value is 7  
1
Voice L1  
2
Data  
4
Fax  
8
Short message service  
Data circuit sync  
Data circuit async  
Dedicated packet access  
Dedicated PAD access  
16  
32  
64  
128  
<status>  
Description  
0
1
Not active  
Active  
320  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
18.12 AT+CCWA Call Waiting  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request call  
waiting  
AT+CCWA=[<n>  
[,<mode>  
[,<class>]]]  
• when<mode>=2 and  
command successful:  
+CCWA:<status>,<class1>[<CR>  
<LF>  
+CCWA: <status>,<class2>[…]]  
+CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the  
current setting  
AT+CCWA?  
• +CCWA: <n>  
+CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the  
command is  
supported  
AT+CCWA=?  
• +CCWA: (list of supported <n>s)  
+CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command allows control of the call waiting supplementary service  
according to 3GPP TS 22.083. Activation, deactivation and status query  
are supported. When querying the status of a network service  
(<mode>=2) the response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should  
be returned only if service is not active for any <class>. Parameter <n>  
is used to disable or enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code  
+CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class>,[<alpha>][,<CLI validity>] to the  
TE when call waiting service is enabled. The command is abortable  
when the network is interrogated.  
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other  
GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS  
standards.  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
<n>  
Description  
0
1
Disable  
Enable  
<mode>  
Description  
0
1
2
Disable  
Enable  
Query status  
321  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
<classx>  
Description  
integer  
Sum of integers each representing a class of information.  
Default value is 7  
1
Voice L1  
2
Data  
4
Fax  
8
Short message service  
Data circuit sync  
Data circuit async  
Dedicated packet access  
Dedicated PAD access  
16  
32  
64  
128  
<status>  
Description  
0
1
Not active  
Active  
<number>  
Description  
String type  
String type phone number of forwarding address in format  
specified by <type>  
<type>  
Description  
Integer format Type of address octet in integer format (GSM 04.08  
10.5.4.7)  
<err>  
Description  
0
Phone failure  
3
Operation not allowed  
Operation not supported  
Invalid index  
4
21  
30  
31  
100  
No network service  
Network timeout  
Unknown  
Unsolicited Result Codes:  
+CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class>  
322  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
Example  
AT+CCWA=?  
+CCWA: (0-1)  
OK  
AT+CCWA?  
+CCWA: 0  
OK  
18.13 AT+CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request call related  
supplementary  
services  
AT+CHLD=<n>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CHLD=?  
• +CHLD: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command allows control of the following call related services:  
• a call can be temporarily disconnected from the ME but the  
connection is retained by the network;  
• multiparty conversation (conference calls);  
• the served subscriber who has two calls (one held and the other  
either active or alerting) can connect the other parties and release the  
served subscriber's own connection.  
Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released, added to conversation,  
and transferred similarly as defined in 3GPP TS 22.030.  
This is based on the GSM/UMTS supplementary services HOLD (Call  
Hold; refer 3GPP TS 22.083 clause 2), MPTY (MultiParty; refer 3GPP  
TS 22.084) and ECT (Explicit Call Transfer; refer 3GPP TS 22.091).  
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other  
GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS  
standards.  
Note!  
Call Hold and MultiParty are only applicable to teleservice 11.  
323  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
It is recommended (although optional) that test command returns a list  
of operations which are supported. The call number required by some  
operations is denoted by “x” (e.g. +CHLD: (0,0x,1,1x,2,2x,3)).  
<n>  
Description  
...  
Integer type; equals to numbers entered before SEND  
button in GSM 02.30 subclause 4.5.5.1  
0
Releases all held calls or sets User Determined User Busy  
(UDUB) for a waiting call  
0X  
1
Releases a specific call X from a held multiparty call  
Releases all active calls (if any exist) and accepts the  
other (held or waiting) call  
1X  
2
Releases a specific active call X  
Places all active calls (if any exist) on hold and accepts  
the other (held or waiting) call  
2X  
Places all active calls on hold, except call X with which  
communication is supported  
3
4
Adds a held call to the conversation  
Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber  
from both calls (explicit call transfer)  
“X” is the numbering (starting with 1) of the call given by the sequence  
of setting up or receiving the calls (active, held or waiting) as seen by  
the served subscriber. Calls hold their number until they are released.  
New calls take the lowest available number. Where both a held and a  
waiting call exists, the above procedures shall apply to the waiting call  
(i.e. not to the held call) in conflicting situation.  
Note!  
The “directory number” case shall be handled with dial command D,  
and the END case with hangup command H (or +CHUP).  
324  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
18.14 AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request calling line  
identification  
AT+CLIP=<n>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CLIP?  
• + CLIP : <n>,<m>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CLIP=?  
• + CLIP : (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command refers to the GSM supplementary service CLIP (Calling  
Line Identification Presentation) that enables a called subscriber to get  
the calling line identity (CLI) of the calling party when receiving a  
mobile terminated call. Set command enables or disables the  
presentation of the CLI at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of  
the supplementary service CLIP in the network.  
When the presentation of the CLI at the TE is enabled (and calling  
subscriber allows), +CLIP: <number>,<type> response is returned after  
every RING (or +CRING: <type>; refer to subclause “Cellular result  
codes +CRC” in GSM 07.07) result code sent from TA to TE. Whether  
this response is used when a normal voice call is answered, depends on  
the manufacturer.  
Read command gives the status of <n> and also triggers an interrogation  
of the provision status of the CLIP service according to GSM 02.81  
(given in <m>).  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
<n>  
Description  
0
1
Disable  
Enable  
<m>  
Description  
0
1
2
CLIP not provisioned  
CLIP provisioned  
Unknown (e.g. no network)  
Unsolicited Result codes:  
325  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
+CLIP: <number>,<type>  
<number>  
Description  
String type  
String type phone number of format specified by <type>  
<type>  
Description  
Integer format Type of address octet in integer (refer to GSM 04.08 sub-  
clause 10.5.4.7)  
Example  
AT+CLIP=1  
OK  
RING  
+CLIP: “07747008670”,129,,,“Matt L”,0  
18.15 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request calling line  
identification restriction  
AT+CLIR=[<n>]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CLIR?  
• +CLIR: <n>,<m>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CLIR=?  
• +CLIR: (list of supported  
<n>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command refers to CLIR-service according to GSM 02.81 that  
allows a calling subscriber to enable or disable the presentation of the  
CLI to the called party when originating a call.  
Set command overrides the CLIR subscription (default is restricted or  
allowed) when temporary mode is provisioned as a default adjustment  
for all following outgoing calls. Using the opposite command can  
revoke this adjustment. If this command is used by a subscriber without  
provision of CLIR in permanent mode the network will act according  
GSM 02.81.  
The setting shall be per logical channel.  
326  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
When the MS is turned off and then turned on again the parameter  
setting <n> shall turn back to default, i.e. the presentation of CLI shall  
be used according to the subscription of the CLIR service, <n> is 0.  
Read command gives the default adjustment for all outgoing calls  
(given in <n>), and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status  
of the CLIR service (given in <m>).  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
Note!  
On a per call base CLIR functionality is explained in subclause “ITU-T  
V.25ter dial command”.  
<n>  
Description  
0
Presentation indicator is used according to the  
subscription of the CLIR service  
1
2
CLIR invocation  
CLIR suppression  
<m>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
CLIR not provisioned  
CLIR provisioned in permanent mode  
Unknown (e.g. no network)  
CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted  
CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed  
327  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
18.16 AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Presentation of  
notification result  
codes from TA to TE  
AT+CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]]  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CSSN?  
• +CSSN: <n>,<m>  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CSSN=?  
• +CSSN: (list of  
supported <n>s),(list  
of supported <m>s)  
• +CME ERROR <err>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated  
notifications. The set command enables or disables the presentation of  
notification result codes from TA to TE.  
When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after  
a mobile originated call setup, unsolicited result code +CSSI:  
<code1>[,<index>] is sent to TE before any other MO call setup result  
codes presented in this ETS or in V.25ter. When several different  
<code1>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its  
own +CSSI result code.  
When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received  
during a mobile terminated call setup or during a call, or when a forward  
check supplementary service notification is received, unsolicited result  
code +CSSU: <code2>[,<index>] is sent to TE. In case of MT call  
setup, result code is sent after every +CLIP result code (refer command  
“Calling line identification presentation +CLIP”) and when several  
different <code2>s are received from the network, each of them shall  
have its own +CSSU result code.  
Note!  
The difference between <index> and <cindex> is that <index> is a  
position mark while <cindex> is a unique value for each CUG. <index>  
is not supported.  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
<n>  
Description  
0
1
Disable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA  
Enable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA  
328  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
<m>  
Description  
0
1
Disable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA  
Enable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA  
<code1>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Unconditional call forwarding is active  
Some of the conditional call forwarding are active  
Call has been forwarded  
Call is waiting  
This is a CUG call (also <index> present)  
Outgoing calls are barred  
Incoming calls are barred  
CLIR suppression rejected  
<index>  
Description  
0…9  
10  
CUG index  
No index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data)  
<code2>  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
This is a forwarded call (MT call setup)  
This is a CUG call (also <index> present) (MT call setup)  
Call has been put on hold (during a voice call)  
Call has been retrieved (during a voice call)  
Multiparty call entered (during a voice call)  
Call on hold has been released (this is not a SS  
notification) (during a voice call)  
6
Forward check SS message received (can be received  
whenever)  
10  
Incoming call has been forwarded  
329  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
18.17 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data  
Description  
Command  
Possible Responses  
Request unstructured  
supplementary service  
data  
AT+CUSD=[<n>[,<str>]]  
• +CME ERROR: <err>  
• OK  
Show the current  
setting  
AT+CUSD?  
• +CUSD: <n>  
• OK  
• ERROR  
Show if the command  
is supported  
AT+CUSD=?  
• +CUSD: (list of  
supported <n>s)  
• OK  
• ERROR  
This command allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary  
Service Data (USSD) according to GSM 02.90. Both network and  
mobile initiated operations are supported. Parameter <n> is used to  
disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code (USSD  
response from the network, or network initiated operation) +CUSD:  
<m>[,<str>,<dcs>] to the TE. In addition, value <n>=2 is used to cancel  
an ongoing USSD session. If <n> is not given then the default value 0  
is taken.  
When <str> is given, a mobile initiated USSD string or a response  
USSD string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. The  
response USSD string from the network is returned in a subsequent  
unsolicited +CUSD: result code.  
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other  
GSM supplementary services is described in the GSM standard.  
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound  
value.  
Some different scenarios are shown below:  
• An incoming network initiated USSD-Notify should be presented to  
the external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the  
external application has enabled result code presentation.  
• An incoming USSD-request asking for a reply should sent to the  
external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the  
external application has enabled result code.  
• If the external application answers to the request with the command  
AT+CUSD then the ME sends the answer to the network.  
• A USSD-request sent with the command AT+CUSD from the  
external application.  
330  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
   
18. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES  
The different alternatives are shown below.  
Network  
Mobile Equipment  
External application  
1
2
Signal  
Sends unsolicited  
result code +CUSD  
Result code presentation  
enabled, presented  
Signal asking  
for reply  
Sends unsolicited  
result code +CUSD  
Result code presentation  
enabled, presented  
3
Answer AT+CUSD  
Sends AT+CUSD  
3b  
<n>  
Description  
0
1
2
Disable result code presentation in the TA  
Enable result code presentation in the TA  
Terminate (abort) USSD dialogue. This value is not applicable to  
the read command response  
<str>  
Description  
string  
String type USSD (when <str> parameter is not given, network is not  
interrogated):  
-If <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used:  
*if TE character set other than “HEX” (refer command Select TE  
Character Set +CSCS): ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into  
current TE character set according to rules of  
GSM 07.05 Annex A  
Example 1  
AT Command  
Result Code  
Description  
AT+CUSD=1,“*34#”  
Enable the Result Code  
presentation in the TAE  
and send a USSD-  
request  
+CUSD:1,“id code” OK  
+CUSD:0 OK  
Further user action  
required, give id code  
AT+CUSD=1,“7465338”  
Id code given  
No further user action  
required  
331  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
Example 2  
Example 3  
AT Command  
Result Code  
Description  
+CUSD:0,“Expensive  
incoming call”  
Incoming USSD-notify telling  
the user that the incoming call  
is expensive  
AT Command  
AT+CUSD=1,“*55*0700#”  
Result Code  
Description  
Enable the Result Code  
presentation in the TAE  
and send a USSD-request  
asking for an alarm at the  
time 07:00  
+CUSD:0,“ALARM”  
At 07:00 the network  
sends an alarm to the user  
Example 4  
AT+CUSD=1,“*#100#”  
OK  
+CUSD: 0,"07787154042"  
OK  
332  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
19. Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands  
AT Command  
Description  
Page No.  
AT  
Attention Command  
AT&C  
Circuit 109 (DCD) Control  
AT&D  
Circuit 108 (DTR) Response  
AT&F  
Set to Factory Defined Configuration  
Circuit 107 (DSR) response  
AT&S  
AT&W  
Store User Profile  
AT*  
List all Supported AT Commands  
M2M Audio Profile Manipulation  
Ericsson M2M Cell Description  
Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification  
Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode  
M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time  
Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modification  
Ericsson M2M Input/Output Read/Write  
Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS  
AT*E2APR  
AT*E2CD  
AT*E2EAMS  
AT*E2EMM  
AT*E2ESC  
AT*E2FAX  
AT*E2IO  
AT*E2NBTS  
AT*E2NMPR  
AT*E2PBCS  
AT*E2PHFB  
AT*E2SMSRI  
AT*E2SPI  
AT*E2SPN  
AT*E2SSD  
AT*E2SSI  
AT*E2SSN  
AT*E2STKC  
AT*E2STKD  
AT*E2STKG  
AT*E2STKI  
Ericsson M2M Set NMEA (GPS) Port Rate  
Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum  
Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable  
Ring Indicator for SMS  
Serial Peripheral Interface  
M2M Service Provider Indication  
M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch  
M2M Supplementary Service Indications  
Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number  
M2M STK Set Up Call  
M2M STK Display Text  
M2M STK Get Inkey  
M2M STK Get Input  
333  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
 
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
AT Command  
Description  
Page No.  
AT*E2STKL  
AT*E2STKM  
AT*E2STKN  
AT*E2STKS  
AT*E2STKTO  
AT*EALR  
AT*EALS  
AT*EAMS  
AT*EARS  
AT*ECAM  
AT*ECAR  
AT*ECAW  
AT*ECPI  
M2M STK Select Item  
M2M STK Set Up Menu  
M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)  
SIM Application Toolkit Settings  
SIM Application Toolkit Settings  
Ericsson Audio Line Request  
Ericsson Request ALS Status  
Ericsson Audio Mode Selection  
Ericsson Audio Ring Signal  
Ericsson Call Monitoring  
Ericsson Callers Allowed Read  
Ericsson Callers Allowed Write  
Ciphering Indicator  
AT*ECSP  
AT*EDIF  
Ericsson Customer Service Profile  
Ericsson Divert Function  
AT*EDST  
Ericsson Daylight Saving Time  
NMEA (GPS) Mode on UART2  
Ericsson Group Item Read  
Identity Presentation Set  
AT*EENMEA  
AT*EGIR  
AT*EIPS  
AT*ELAM  
AT*ELIN  
Ericsson Local Audio Mode  
Ericsson Line Set  
AT*EMAR  
AT*EMIC  
AT*EMIR  
AT*EPEE  
Ericsson Master Reset  
Ericsson Microphone Mode  
Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request  
Ericsson Pin Event  
AT*EPNR  
AT*EPNW  
AT*EPRR  
AT*EPRW  
AT*ERIL  
Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network  
Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network  
Ericsson Personal Ring Type Read  
Ericsson Personal Ring Type Write  
Ericsson Ring Level Set  
AT*ERIN  
Ericsson Ring Set  
AT*ERIP  
Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Command  
Ericsson Add to Group  
AT*ESAG  
334  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
19. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS  
AT Command  
Description  
Page No.  
AT*ESCG  
Ericsson Create Group  
AT*ESCN  
Ericsson Set Credit Card Number  
Ericsson Delete Group  
AT*ESDG  
AT*ESDI  
Ericsson Delete Group Item  
Ericsson Group Read  
AT*ESGR  
AT*ESIL  
Ericsson Silence Command  
Ericsson Set Line Name  
AT*ESLN  
AT*ESMA  
Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound  
Ericsson Settings Minute Minder  
Ericsson Settings Number  
Ericsson Settings Own Melody  
Ericsson Set External Volume Control  
Accumulated Call Meter  
Set Alarm  
AT*ESMM  
AT*ESNU  
AT*ESOM  
AT*EXVC  
AT+CACM  
AT+CALA  
AT+CALD  
AT+CAMM  
AT+CAOC  
AT+CBST  
Alarm Delete  
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum  
Advice of Charge  
Select Bearer Service Type  
Call Forwarding Number and Conditions  
Set Clock and Date  
AT+CCFC  
AT+CCLK  
AT+CCWA  
AT+CEER  
Call Waiting  
Extended Error Report  
AT+CFUN  
AT+CGACT  
AT+CGATT  
AT+CGDATA  
AT+CGDCONT  
AT+CGEREP  
AT+CGMI  
AT+CGMM  
AT+CGMR  
AT+CGPADDR  
AT+CGQMIN  
Set Phone Functionality  
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate  
GPRS Attach or Detach  
Enter Data State  
Define PDP Context  
GPRS Event Reporting  
Read MS Manufacturer Identification  
Read MS Model Identification  
Read MS Revision Identification  
Show PDP Address  
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)  
335  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
AT Command  
Description  
Page No.  
AT+CGQREQ  
AT+CGREG  
AT+CGSMS  
AT+CGSN  
AT+CHLD  
AT+CHSC  
AT+CHSD  
AT+CHSN  
AT+CHSR  
AT+CHSU  
AT+CHUP  
AT+CIMI  
Quality of Service Profile (Requested)  
GPRS Network Registration Status  
Select Service for MO SMS Messages  
Read MS Product Serial Number Identification  
Call Hold and Multiparty  
HSCSD Current Call Parameters  
HSCSD Device Parameters  
HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration  
HSCSD Parameters Report  
HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading  
Hang Up Call  
Subscriber Identification  
Indicator Control  
AT+CIND  
AT+CLAC  
AT+CLCK  
AT+CLIP  
List All Available AT Commands  
Facility Lock  
Calling Line Identification  
Calling Line Identification Restriction  
Mobile Equipment Error  
AT+CLIR  
AT+CMEE  
AT+CMER  
AT+CMGC  
AT+CMGD  
AT+CMGF  
AT+CMGL  
AT+CMGR  
AT+CMGS  
AT+CMGW  
AT+CMOD  
AT+CMSS  
AT+CMUX  
AT+CNMI  
AT+CNUM  
AT+COLP  
AT+COPS  
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting  
Send Command  
Delete Message  
Message Format  
List Message  
Read Message  
Send Message  
Write Message to Memory  
Call Mode  
Send From Storage  
Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol  
New Message Indications to TE  
Subscriber Number  
Connected Line Identification on Presentation  
Operator Selection  
336  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
19. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS  
AT Command  
Description  
Page No.  
AT+CPAS  
AT+CPBF  
AT+CPBR  
AT+CPBS  
AT+CPBW  
AT+CPIN  
AT+CPMS  
AT+CPUC  
AT+CPWD  
AT+CR  
Phone Activity Status  
Phonebook Find  
Phonebook Read  
Phone Storage  
Phonebook Write  
PIN Control  
Preferred Message Storage  
Price Per Unit and Currency Table  
Change Password  
Service Reporting Control  
Cellular Result Code  
AT+CRC  
AT+CREG  
AT+CRES  
AT+CRLP  
AT+CSAS  
AT+CSCA  
AT+CSCB  
AT+CSCS  
AT+CSDH  
AT+CSMP  
AT+CSMS  
AT+CSQ  
AT+CSSN  
AT+CTZU  
AT+CUSD  
AT+CVHU  
AT+F___  
Network Registration  
Restore SMS Settings  
Radio Link Protocol  
Save Settings  
Service Centre Address  
Select Cell Broadcast Message Type  
Select Character Set  
Show Text Mode Parameters  
Set Text Mode Parameters  
Select Message Service  
Signal Strength  
Supplementary Service Notification  
Automatic Time Zone Update  
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data  
Voice Hang-Up  
Low Level Fax Commands  
Read Manufacturer Identification  
Read Model Identification  
Read Revision Identification  
Cable Interface Character Format  
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control  
Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting  
AT+GMI  
AT+GMM  
AT+GMR  
AT+ICF  
AT+IFC  
AT+ILRR  
337  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL  
AT Command  
Description  
Page No.  
AT+IPR  
AT+VTS  
AT+WS46  
ATA  
Cable Interface Port Command  
DTMF and Tone Generation  
Mode Selection  
Answer  
ATD  
Dial  
ATE  
Command Echo  
ATH  
Hang up  
ATI  
Identification Information  
Monitor Speaker Loudness  
Monitor Speaker Control  
Return to Online Data Mode  
Select Pulse Dialling  
ATL  
ATM  
ATO  
ATP  
ATQ  
ATS0  
ATS2  
ATS3  
ATS4  
ATS5  
ATS6  
ATS7  
ATS8  
ATS10  
ATT  
Result Code Suppression  
Automatic Answer Control  
Escape Sequence Character  
Command Line Termination Character  
Response Formatting Character  
Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)  
Blind Dial Delay Control  
Connection Completion Timeout  
Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control  
Automatic Disconnect Delay Control  
Select Tone Dialling  
ATV  
DCE Response Format  
ATX  
Call Progress Monitoring Control  
Reset to Default Configuration  
ATZ  
Unsolicited  
Description  
Page No.  
Result Code  
*E2STKE  
*E2STKP  
*E2STKR  
*E2STKU  
STK Send Short Message  
STK Send SS  
STK Refresh  
STK Send USSD  
338  
LZT 123 7263 R1C  

Sony Ericsson Cell Phone Z300 User Manual
Siemens ST55 User Manual
Seagate ST9308110A User Manual
Samsung SCH S189 User Manual
Samsung Galaxy S3 Unlocked GSM Android Smartphone I9300BLU User Manual
Rosewill HDD RAID RSV S4 X User Manual
PQI U172 User Manual
Pioneer DEH 3400 User Manual
Oregon Scientific DIGITAL TRAVEL RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) CONTROLLED CLOCK RM822 (UK VERSION RM823) User Manual
Nokia 7900 Prism User Manual